2005 mdx online reference owner's manual...

2005 MDX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................ ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ................................................................................................................... 4

Driver and Passenger Safety ............................................................................................................ 7 Seat belts, SRS, and child protection.Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 57Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column.Features ............................................................................................................................................. 105Climate, audio, rear entertainment, steering wheel, secruity, cruise control, HomeLink and OnstarBefore Driving.................................................................................................................................. 185Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading.Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 197Engine and transmission operation.Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 227Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage.

Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 259Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses.Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 281Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls.Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 295Warranty and contact information.Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 299How to order.Index..................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary Fluid capacities and tire pressures.

Important Handling Information. ........................................................................................... iii

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe MDX. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S3V840

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’sstaff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura.Your Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased toanswer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Acura MDX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as ‘‘event data recorders’’or ‘‘sensing and diagnostic modules.’’

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－

－

－－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

on the vehicle.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Your MDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or an accident.

198223Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMGAUGES (P.68)

(P.82)

(P.96)

(P.92)

(P.188)

(P.187) (P.94)(P.111) (P.104)

(P.102)

(P.112)

(P.106)(P.93)MOONROOFINSTRUMENT PANEL (P.59)

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘A’’ logo.:

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

FOG LIGHTS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

CRUISE CONTROL

HORN

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

CRUISE CONTROL

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

VTM-4 LOCK PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P.74)

(P.212)

(P.146)

(P.77)

(P.130) (P.78)(P.147) (P.71)

(P.77)

(P.33)(P.204)(P.76)

(P.76)

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains how yourairbags work, and it tells you how toproperly restrain infants andchildren in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

........ 22...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 24

......Airbag System Components . 24......... 26

........................Advanced Airbag . 28...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29

How Your Side Curtain Airbag.........................................Work . 31

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 32

How The Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 32

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 33

.............................Airbag Service . 33...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 35

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 35

All Children Should Sit in a Back...........................................Seat . 36

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks to

...............................Children . 36If You Must Drive with Several

...................................Children . 38If a Child Requires Close

..................................Attention . 38...Additional Safety Precautions . 38

Protecting infants and.........................Small Children . 40.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.........Protecting Small Children . 41.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 43....................Installing a Child Seat . 44

...............................With LATCH . 45..........................With a Seat Belt . 47

..............................With a Tether . 48...........Protecting Larger Children . 50

...................Checking Seat Belt Fit . 51......................Using a Booster Seat . 51

......When Can a Child Sit in Front . 52.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

...................................Safety Labels . 55

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterseat and a lap/shoulder belt untilthey can use the belt properlywithout a booster seat (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

16

51

231

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Important Safety Precautions

8

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

(7)(10)

(9) (3) (1)

(2)(6)(10)

(7) (8)(5)

(2)

(11)(4)

(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags(11) Side Curtain Airbags

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Seat Belts

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

29

26

CONTINUED


Airbags

What you should do:

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. A frontpassenger should move their seat asfar back from the dashboard aspossible.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

31


Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

12

－

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate are closed and locked.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenagers who are large enoughand mature enough to ride in thefront seat.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Your vehicle has a doormonitor indicator on the

instrument panel to indicate when aspecific door or the tailgate is nottightly closed.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doormonitor indicator works.

35 39

8262

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors Adjust the Front Seats1. 2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

If your seat is adjusted manually,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position. Seepage for more information onhow to adjust the front seats.

86


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

86

88

CONTINUED


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

The second row center seat, andboth third row seats, have adetachable shoulder belt that can beunlatched and retracted, to allow theseats to be folded down. See page

for how to unlatch and relatchthe seat belts.

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack, thencheck that the belt rests across thecenter of your chest and over yourshoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

88

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors.To adjust the height of an beltanchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

21


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

RELEASEBUTTONS

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

Advice for Pregnant Women6.

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

CONTINUED

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.


Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

20

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seven seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your belts.

The lap/shoulder belts in the centerseat of the second row and both ofthe third row seats are equipped witha detachable anchor that has twoparts: a small latch plate and abuckle.

The detachable anchor shouldnormally be latched whenever theseats-backs are in an upright position.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

If you turn the ignition to ON (II)before fastening your seat belt, thebeeper will sound and the indicatorwill flash. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator will stop flashing butremain on.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

16

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to rollover (see page

).

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.

47

31

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


22

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

249

249

Acura Warranty Information


Seat Belt Maintenance

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your Airbag System (SRS) includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the front andrear pillars and above the windows.The front and rear pillars on bothsides are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

26

29

31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

24

(5)

(3)

(4)

(4)

(5)

(2)

(10)

(8)

(10)

(8)

(9)

(11)(7) (9)(1)(6)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Side Curtain Airbags(7) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(8) Front Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors(9) Front Impact Sensor(10) Side Impact Sensors(11) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

CONTINUED

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight of an infant orsmall child is detected, thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Height and position sensors thatcan detect whether a child is in thepassenger’s side airbag path andsignal the control unit to turn theairbag off (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition is in ON (II).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

22

33

28

33

33

32

31

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

25

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthe advanced airbag system hasturned the passenger’s airbag off(see page ).33


How Your Front Airbags Work

26

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.


Dual-Threshold Airbags

is latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Acura doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child, the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat ispositioned too far forward, theairbag will inflate with less force,regardless of the severity of theimpact.If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.


Advanced Airbags

28

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

If there is no passenger in the frontseat, the airbag will be off. However,the Passenger Airbag Off indicatorwill not come on.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause thepassenger airbag to be shut off.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

33

CONTINUED


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

How Your Side Airbags Work

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if the heightand position sensors in the seatdetect a child has leaned into theside airbag’s deployment path, theairbag will shut off.

If the Side Airbag Off Indicatorcomes on (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

32


Side Airbag Cutoff System

30

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about roll over, the controlunit will instantly deploy both sidecurtain airbags.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

31

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags, sensors, or seatbelt tensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), this indicator will come onbriefly then go out. This tells you thesystem is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignition toON (II).

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

This indicatoralerts you that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should comeon briefly and go out (see page ).If it doesn’t come on, stays on, orcomes on while driving without apassenger in the front seat, have thesystem checked.

60

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SRS Indicator Works

not


32

U.S. CanadaIgnoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems, ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff, but the indicator will not comeon.

However, if the indicator comes onwith no passenger in the front, orwith an adult in the seat, there maybe a problem with the advancedairbag system. Have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

The Passenger Airbag Off indicatormay also come on and go offrepeatedly if total weight on the seatis near the airbag cutoff threshold.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child on the front passenger’sseat. It does there is aproblem with the airbag.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright, and wear the seat beltproperly.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

Airbag Service

not mean


An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.


Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Additional Safety Precautions

34

－

－－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

40 5050 53

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

33

50

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat


InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

36

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

－

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

57

13

18

1682

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention



Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

38

－

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.


Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.


Lock all doors and tailgate whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front. Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

Or, it can interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

40

CONTINUED

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childseat directly behind the frontpassenger’s seat, move the seat asfar forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

33

Child Seat Placement

Child Seat Type


Protecting Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.


42

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two second-row seats.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) system.

45

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

43

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the back seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

44

CONTINUED

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the outersecond row seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

45

RIGID TYPELOWER ANCHORS

MARKS

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint, over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

6.

4.

5.

7.

88


46

FLEXIBLE TYPE ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe second or third row.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


48

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seat-back.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

2.1.47

3.

CONTINUED

Second Row Installation


riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Select the anchor point you wantto use. Raise the cargo area floor,and remove the cover with a smallflat-tipped screwdriver orfingernail file.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

Each third row seat has a tetheranchorage point on the tailgate sill.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of the secondrow installation.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

2.

1.

Third Row Installation Protecting Larger Children

Installing a Child Seat, Protecting Larger Children

50

Allowing a larger child age 12 orunder to sit in front can result ininjury or death if the passenger’sfront airbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

Some states also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far to the rear as possible,and be sure the child is wearing theseat belt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards and that youfollow the booster seat maker’sinstructions.

Protecting Larger Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

52

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improve achild’s comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt can makethe belt less effective and increasethe chance of serious injury in acrash.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a booster,the child should not sit in front.

51

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger Children


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

54

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which is removed bythe owner), contact your Acuradealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

RADIATOR CAP

HOOD

DASHBOARD

BATTERY LABEL

U.S. models

Canadian models

Canadian modelsU.S. modelsOn vehicles with side curtain airbags

Safety Labels

56

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58............................Instrument Panel . 59

....................Instrument Indicators . 60.............................................Gauges . 68

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 70

Windshield Wipers and...................................Washers . 71

Rear Window Wiper and.....................................Washer . 73

...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 74........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

.................Hazard Warning Button . 76

.................Rear Window Defogger . 77.........................................Fog Light . 77

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 78..................................................Keys . 79

........................Immobilizer System . 80................................Ignition Switch . 81

......................................Door Locks . 82.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

.................................................Seats . 86....................................Seat Heaters . 91

..............................Power Windows . 92.........................................Moonroof . 93

.................................Parking Brake . 94

.............................................Mirrors . 95Driving Position Memory

..........................................System . 97.................................Interior Lights . 99

.........Interior Convenience Items . 101.....................Beverage Holders . 102

.............Console Compartment . 102..................................Glove Box . 102

...................Rear Compartment . 103.............................Cargo Hooks . 103

...................................Sun Visor . 103............................Vanity Mirror . 103

........Accessory Power Sockets . 104

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

57

Control Locations

58

MIRRORCONTROLS

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMGAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE

INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.59)(P.68)

(P.82)

(P.96)

(P.92)

(P.188)

(P.187) (P.94)(P.111) (P.104)

(P.102)

(P.112)

(P.106)MOONROOF (P.93)

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.CONTINUED

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM (VSA) INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITORTIRE PRESSURE MONITOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

WASHER LEVELINDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDERINDICATOR

PARKINGBRAKE ANDBRAKESYSTEMINDICATOR

TPMS INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

BRAKE LAMPINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

MAINTENANCEREQUIREDINDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.273)

(P.60)

(P.60)

(P.67)

(P.64)

(P.64)

(P.62)/(P.66)

(P.63)

(P.65)

(P.62)

(P.65) (P.61)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.60)

(P.60)

(P.64)

(P.63)

(P.61)

(P.60)(P.63)

(P.63)(P.61)

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your seat belt,the beeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals.

See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Itreminds you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts. A beeper alsosounds if you have not fastened yourseat belt.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), see page formore information. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your front

airbags or automatic seat belttensioners. This indicator will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags, passenger’s sideairbag automatic cutoff system,driver’s seat position sensor, frontpassenger’s weight sensors, or sidecurtain airbags. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

273

272

272

32

32

32

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator

60

U.S. Canada

This indicator has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).It is a reminder to check theparking brake. A beeper sounds ifyou try to drive with the parkingbrake not fully released. Drivingwith the parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the brakesand tires.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer. Withthe indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock. For more information, seepage .

If the indicator remains on afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

1.

2.

209

80

274


Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

U.S. Canada

If a brake light does not work, theindicator comes on

when you push the brake pedal withthe ignition switch to ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Replace the bulb assoon as possible (see page ).

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the tailgate or anydoor is not closed tightly.

All of the indicators in the monitordisplay come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II).

When you press the Hazard Warningbutton, both turn signal lights blink.All turn signals on the outside of thevehicle should flash.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicator does notblink or blinks rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

246

247

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor


62

BRAKE LAMP

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. See page

for information on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcomes on (see page ).

146

74

76

241

Canadian models only

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

63

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. The indicatorshould come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II). If it comes on while driving,it indicates the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If thisindicator comes on at any other time,there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked.

If the indicator blinks while driving,pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill also come on when the lightswitch is in AUTO and the lightsturn on automatically.

If you turn the ignition switch toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)without turning off the light switch,this indicator will remain on. Areminder chime will also sound whenyou open the driver’s door.

U.S. models only

U.S. Models except Touring

Lights On Indicator A/T TemperatureIndicator

VTM-4 Indicator


64

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

Continuing to drive with the A/TTemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the VehicleStability Assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

1.

2.

3.211

211

211

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

65

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition to ON (II).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition to ON (II).If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the TirePressure Monitor, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). Refer to page

for more information.

The appropriate tire indicator willcome on along with the Low TirePressure Indicator if a tire isextremely under inflated or hassuddenly lost pressure. See Low TirePressure Indicator for what to do ifthis indicator comes on.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), there is a problemwith the TPMS. With this indicatoron, the low tire pressure indicatorand the tire pressure monitor will notcome on when a tire loses pressure.Take the vehicle to your dealer tohave the system checked.261

274205


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

66

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.Refer to the maintenance schedulefor normal and severe drivingconditions on pages and .

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on for2 seconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the Select andReset buttons on the instrumentpanel, then turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

Hold the buttons forapproximately 10 seconds until theindicator goes off.

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km), thisindicator will light for 2 secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash for10 seconds.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourAcura dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

1.

2.

3.

231 232


Maintenance RequiredIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

RESET BUTTON

SELECT BUTTON

This shows the total distance yourvehicle has been driven. It measuresmiles in U.S. models and kilometersin the Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Gauges

Odometer

Fuel Gauge

68

TACHOMETER TEMPERATUREGAUGE

FUEL GAUGESPEEDOMETER

TRIP METER RESETBUTTON

TRIP METER

ODOMETER

TRIP METERSELECTBUTTON

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper white mark. Ifit reaches the red (Hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Turn topage for instructions andprecautions on checking the engine’scooling system.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Reset buttonuntil the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Selectbutton repeatedly. Each trip meterworks independently, so you cankeep track of two different distances.When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.

270

Gauges

Trip Meter Temperature Gauge

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

SELECT BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

70

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

VTM-4 LOCKINSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

FOG LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HORN

CRUISE CONTROL

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEM OFFSWITCH

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

CRUISE CONTROL

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P.74)

(P.77)

(P.146)

(P.212)

(P.130)

(P.78)

(P.146) (P.33)

(P.71)

(P.77)

(P.204)(P.76)

(P.76)

OFFINT : Intermittent

: Low speed: High speed

MISTWindshield Washers

Turn the rotary switch at the end ofthe lever or push down or pull thelever to select a position.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is variedautomatically according to thevehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theINT TIME ring. If you turn itto the shortest delay, thewipers will change to lowspeed operation when thevehicle speed exceeds 12 mph(20 km/h).

: The wipers run at low speed.

: The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at high speeduntil you release the lever.

: Pull the wipercontrol lever toward you andhold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever.The wipers run at low speed,then complete one moresweep after you release thelever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

OFF:

INT:

MIST:

Windshield Washer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

Touring ModelWhen the system senses rainfall, itturns on the windshield wipers andvaries their speed (intermittent, lowspeed, or high speed) depending onhow hard it is raining.

When the rotary switch is in the(low speed) or (high speed)position, the windshield wipers runat that speed. Automatic sensing isdisabled.

You can adjust the sensitivity of thesystem by turning the AUTO SENSring next to the rotary switch.

The automatic intermittent wipersystem senses rainfall andautomatically turns on thewindshield wipers. To enable sensing,turn the rotary switch at the end ofthe wiper lever to AUTO.


Automatic Intermittent Wipers

72

The rainfall sensor is located in thewindshield near the rearview mirror.If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,dust, etc., the wipers may notoperate properly or may operateunexpectedly.

The rear window wiper switch islocated next to the windshield wiperswitch.

OFFONTurn and hold to use the wiperand washer.

1.2.3.


Rear Window Wiper and Washer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

RAINFALL SENSORDo not put the wiper switch in AUTOwhen driving through a car wash. Turnof f this system when not in use.

－

－－

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the Lights Onindicator comes on as a reminder.This light remains on if you leave thelight switch on and turn the ignitionswitch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK(0).

To turn on, pull thelever back until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull it back againto return to low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beams

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.

63

Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal

High BeamsHeadlights

Turn Signal, Headlights

74

－ The Automatic Lightingfeature turns on the headlights, allother exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO at any time.The lights will come on automaticallywhen the outside light level becomeslow (at dusk, for example). Thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. The lights and indicatorwill turn off automatically when thesystem senses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when you openthe driver’s door. To turn them onagain, either turn the ignition switchto ON (II) or turn the light switch to

.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingstructures.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or the engine off for along time.

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

Headlights

AUTO

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

LIGHT SENSOR

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Push the red button to the right ofthe display to turn on the hazardwarning lights (four-way flashers).This causes all four outside turnsignals and both indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The dial on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of theinstrument panel lights, the bluelighting in the upper console and thefront foot wells.

Canadian ModelsDaytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

76

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL DIAL

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

Turn the fog lights on and off bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button lights to show the foglights are on.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when you turn theheadlights off or onto high beam.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side to side.

Rear Window Defogger Fog Lights

Rear Window Defogger, Fog LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

78

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

KeysInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEYS(BLACK)

VALET KEY(GRAY)

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

80

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition SwitchInstrum

entsand

Controls

81

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

To lock all doors and the tailgate,press the master door lock switch oneither front door, press the lock tabdown on the driver’s door, or use thekey on the outside lock on the driver’sdoor.

Pressing up on either master doorlock switch will unlock all of thedoors and the tailgate.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. They arenot disabled if the driver’s door isclosed. Pushing the switch down onthe open passenger’s door will lockall doors and the tailgate.

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up. To close the tailgate, usethe inner handle to pull it down, thenpress down on the back edge.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

The lock tab on any door locks andunlocks that door. To unlock the

driver’s door from the outside, turnthe key and release it. If you turnand hold it, all doors and the tailgateunlock.

54

Door Locks

Childproof Door Locks

Tailgate

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Lockout Prevention

82

LOCK LEVER

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TAB

－

－

－ Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior and interior lights will flash.When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the doors and tailgate arelocked and the security system hasset. This button does not work if anydoor or tailgate is not fully closed.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior and interior lights willflash twice when you push thebutton. If you do not open any dooror the tailgate within 30 seconds,they will automatically relock.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights and the cargo area light,depending on their switch positions,will come on (see page ). If youdo not open any door or the tailgate,the lights stay on for about 30seconds, then go out. If you relockthe doors and the tailgate with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

96

Remote Transmitter

PANIC

LOCK

UNLOCK

Remote Transmitter Care

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

＋

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver. Remove the oldbattery and insert a new battery withthe side facing up. Snap the twohalves of the transmitter case backtogether.

Battery type: CR2025




Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

84

On Touring Model

You can turn the driving positionmemory activation off and on. Toturn it off, press and hold the LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at the sametime for about one second. The LEDin the remote transmitter will blinktwice. Then release the buttons.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor one second to indicate thefeature has been turned on.

Each remote transmitter will alsoactivate the Driving PositionMemory System (see page ).When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remotetransmitter, you will hear a beep.The driver’s seat, except powerlumbar, and outside mirrors move tothe positions stored in that memorylocation. You will hear two beeps

when the movement is complete.

The driving position memoryactivated (Memory 1, Memory 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

If the seat and mirrors are already inthe proper positions, you will hearthree beeps when you open the door.

97

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

With Memory 1 With Memory 2

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(Driver’s Touring seatonly)

Moves the front of theseat up or down and therear of the seat up ordown.

Raises or lowers the seat.

On the Touring Package, thepassenger seat has the sameadjustments as the driver’s seat butwithout any lumbar adjustment.

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments

86

－

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

Vary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the lumbarsupport through its full range.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seats, pull up on the lever onthe outside of the seat bottom.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

Without Touring Package

Without Touring Package

13 14

Seats

Driver’s Manual Lumbar SupportPassenger Manual SeatAdjustments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert a key into the slot on the sideof the small buckle. Line up thetriangle marks on the plate andbuckle when reattaching the belt andbuckle.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways and pushthe restraint down.

Head Restraints Detachable Seat Belt Anchors

Seats

88

RELEASE BUTTON

SMALL LATCH PLATE

TRIANGULAR MARKS

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

The left and right halves can befolded up separately.

If you are folding the left half ofthe seat, use the ignition key torelease the center seat belt fromthe detachable anchor. Allow theseat belt to retract into the roof.Insert the latch plate into the roofholder.

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Fold the seat-back forward.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving.

To change the seat-back angle of theseats in the second row, pull up onthe handle on the outside of the seat-back.

2.

3.

1.

4.

Seats

Folding the Second SeatAdjusting the Second Seat

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

HANDLE

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

Store the head restraints in thestorage compartment. Make surethe head restraints are face up(storing them face down candamage the compartment or theheadrests), then insert the shaftsinto the holes in the sides of thestorage compartment.

Use the ignition key to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor.

Pull on the handle on the back of theseat-back, move the seat-back to thedesired position, and release thehandle. Let the seat-back latch in thenew position.

Remove the head restraints bypushing the release buttons andpulling the restraints out.

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the side of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and the seat will slide forward.

After you return the seat-back to theupright position, push the whole seatbackwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

1.

2.

3.

Seats

Folding the Third Row Seat

Adjusting the Third Row SeatThird Row Access

90

HANDLE

THIRDSEATRELEASE LEVER

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seat isonly heated in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag off system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Pushthe front of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

To fold the third row seat,the second row must be folded downor completely up right.

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Make sure the outer shoulder beltsare positioned on each hookwhenever the third seat is folded.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving. Reinstall the headrestraints. Reconnect the seat beltsto the detachable anchors.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

4.

193

Seat Heaters

Carrying Cargo

Seats, Seat HeatersInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

NOTE:

SEAT HEATERS

－

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window. Toopen the window, push the switchdown and hold it. Release the switchwhen you want the window to stop.Pull back on the switch and hold it toclose the window.

To open/close the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down or up to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowwill automatically go up or down allthe way. To stop the window, pull/push on the window switch briefly.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

Power Windows

AUTO

92

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

－ If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

To open the moonroof, pull back themoonroof switch firmly.

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe switch forward.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

AUTO REVERSE Moonroof

Power Windows, MoonroofInstrum

entsand

Controls

93

MOONROOF SWITCH

To tilt the moonroof up, press thebutton in. To closed it, push thebutton forward. Make sure everyone’shands are away from the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. Openingeither front door cancels thisfunction.

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, push on the pedal again.The parking brake indicator on theinstrument panel should go out whenthe parking brake is fully releasedwith the engine running (see page

).61

Moonroof, Parking Brake

Parking Brake

94

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

Mirrors

Parking Brake, MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

95

AUTO SWITCH

SENSOR INDICATORDriving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is put into gear with theparking brake on.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

With the selector switch in thecenter (off) position, the passenger’sside mirror will pivot downwardslightly when you shift thetransmission into Reverse. Thisgives you a better view of the side ofthe vehicle while parallel parking.The mirror returns to its originalposition when you take thetransmission out of reverse.

Turn this feature off by leaving theselector switch in the left or rightposition.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Touring model only

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

96

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Touring Model

Press and release the MEMObutton on the control panel. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat and outside mirrors are nowstored.

Seat, except for power lumbar, andoutside mirror positions, can bestored in separate memories. Youselect a memorized position bypushing the appropriate button orusing the appropriate remotetransmitter (Memory 1 orMemory 2).

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).You cannot add a new drivingposition in the memory unless theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. You can recall amemorized position with theignition switch in any position.

3.

1.

2.86

96

CONTINUED

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

97

MEMO BUTTON

MEMORY BUTTONS

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1, or 2.Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.Shift out of Park.Adjust the outside mirrors.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

Make sure the vehicle is parked.

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps, and the indicator willremain on.

1.

2.

Driving Position Memory System

Selecting a Memorized Position

98

When this switch is in the position:

When the switch is in theposition:

When the light control switch is in theposition:

OFF

None of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

DoorActivated

With any door or the tailgate leftopen, the lights stay on about 3minutes, then go out.

ON

The individual map lights come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened, or when the remotetransmitter is used to unlock thedoors. When the doors and thetailgate are closed, each light canbe turned on and off by pushingthe lens.

The cargo area (3rd row) lightcomes on when any door or thetailgate is opened if the switch inthe light is in the door activatedposition. When the doors and thetailgate are closed, the cargo arealight can be turned on with theswitch in the light.The map lights in the front can be

turned on and off by pushing eachlens, the second row map lightscannot.

The lights go out about 6 secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed.

All the individual map lights andfootwell lights come on and stayon as long as the switch remains inthe ON position.

The cargo (3rd row) area lightcomes on if the switch is in thedoor activated position.

Light Control Switch

Interior LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

99

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

ON

OFF

Turn on the front row individual maplights by pushing the lens. Push thelens again to turn it off. With thelight control switch in the dooractivated position, the second rowmap lights can be turned on bypushing the lens. Push the lens againto turn it off.

The light in the tailgate has an on-offswitch to control if the light comeson when the tailgate is opened.

.The light has a three-position switch.In the OFF position, the light doesnot come on. In the center position, itcomes on when you open the tailgateor doors. In the ON position, it stayson continuously.This light also works with the lightcontrol switch (see page ).

The courtesy lights in all four doorscome on when you open any door.The light around the ignition switchonly come on when you open thedriver’s door. After you close thedoor, the ignition switch light stayson for several seconds.

99

The light control switch must be ineither the ON or DOOR ACTIVATEDposition for the cargo area light to comeon

Individual Map Lights Individual Interior Lights Cargo Area Light

Tailgate Light

Interior Lights

100

DOOR ACTIVATED

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

101

BEVERAGE HOLDERCONSOLE COMPARTMENT

REAR COMPARTMENT

CARGO HOOKS

COIN BOX

BEVERAGE HOLDER

VANITY MIRROR

GLOVE BOX

Your vehicle is equipped with a flip-over center console lid that providesa tray and a beverage holder for thesecond row passengers. To open thebeverage holders, pull up the centerlever on the center console and liftthe lid.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

Open the front beverage holder bypushing on the lid.

Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items

102

LEVER

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Storage compartments are located inthe armrests for the third row seat.To open a compartment, pull thelever and lift the lid.

The hooks on the floor of the cargoarea enable you to tie down itemsstored in the back. Make sure allstored items are secured beforedriving.

When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip and swing it out. Slidethe extension out to get morecoverage on the side window.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe sun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit.

The light comes on only when theparking lights or headlights are on.

Rear Compartment

Cargo Hooks

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

103

EXTENSION

SUN VISOR

Your vehicle has three accessorypower sockets. The front accessorypower socket is located under theaudio system. The second socket islocated in the center consolecompartment. The rear socket isbehind the third seat on the driver’sside.

To use the socket in the consolecompartment, pull the cover up.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

When both the front and consolesockets are being used, thecombined power rating of bothaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

Accessory Power Sockets

Interior Convenience Items

104

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them. (If you selected anoptional audio system, refer to theoperating instructions that camewith it.)

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 106.............................Airflow Buttons . 107

...................Rear Climate Control . 111..............Climate Control Sensors . 111

..........................Playing the Radio . 112............................Radio Reception . 116

........Playing XM Satellite Radio . 118..................................Playing a CD . 123...................................CD Changer . 125

....................Protecting Your CDs . 128.....CD Changer Error Messages . 129

.............Steering Wheel Controls . 130.................Radio Theft Protection . 131

........Rear Entertainment System . 132............................Security System . 145

...............................Cruise Control . 146..............................Trip Computer . 149

.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 155HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 156..........................HandsFreeLink . 160

............................................OnStar . 173

FeaturesF

eatures

105

TM

Vents, Heating, and A/C

106

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURE BUTTONS

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

DEFROST BUTTON

REAR A/C CONTROL

(Without Navigation System) (With Navigation System)

A/CBUTTON

MODEBUTTON

FAN SPEEDBUTTON

A/CICON

FAN SPEEDICONS

MODEICONS

△▽

▲

▼

Push the button to increase thetemperature of air flow. Push thebutton to decrease it. When you setthe temperature to its lower limit orits upper limit, the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

This button or icon turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.This button turns the rear window

defogger on and off (see page ).

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior isrecirculated throughout the system.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

Push the button or icon toincrease the fan speed and air flow.Push the button or icon todecrease it.

Use the mode control button or iconto select the vents the air flows from.

Regardless of what mode youare in, air flows out of the cornervents unless the system is shut off orthe vent is manually shut off.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Airflows from the floor vents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the centervents in the dashboard.

77

CONTINUED

Fan Control Button/Icon

Temperature Control Buttons

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/Icon

Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control Button/Icon

Airflow ButtonsF

eatures

107

NOTE:

▲ ▼

△▽

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Turn on the A/C by pressing theA/C button or touching the A/Cicon on the models with navigationsystem. A/C ON will be displayedon the screen.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum heat.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control buttons.

Press the A/C-INFO button toshow the information screen.Select the desired mode bytouching the MODE icon, and setthe fan to the desired speed bytouching the or icon.Adjust the warmth with thetemperature control buttons ( or

).

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode and turns on the A/C.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Set the temperature to maximum.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.2.3.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

69

Vehicles without Navigation System

Vehicles without Navigation System


Using the A/CUsing the Heater

Ventilation

108

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to FreshAir mode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator will not comeon in U.S. vehicles.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

The vehicle has two A/C andheater units. Both these units arecontroled by the front panel controls,unless the RR A/C button is turnedon. The rear passengers can alsoadjust the direction, and temperatureand amount of the airflow.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

If the interior is very warm,


Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost

Features

109

NOTE:

The Automatic Climate Controlsystem can adjust the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control buttons.You will see FULL AUTO in thesystem’s display.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature. In FULL AUTOthe rear A/C control panel cannot beused.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remainautomatically controlled.Manually selecting a function causesthe word FULL in the display to goout.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

If you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to FreshAir mode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator will not comeon in U.S. vehicles.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windshield faster, youcan close the dashboard corner ventsby rotating the wheel below eachvent. This sends more warm air tothe windshield defroster vents. Oncethe windshield is clear, select FreshAir mode to avoid fogging thewindows.For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.2.

1.

2.3.


To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Manual Operation

To Turn Everything Off

Using Automatic Climate Control

110

Press the RR A/C MANUAL buttonto enable the rear A/C control panel.The indicator in the button will comeon. A passenger in the second rowcan then use the temperature controldial, fan speed dial, and modebuttons to adjust the temperatureand airflow to their preference. Thisis limited by the system’s minimumand maximum temperature.

Individual rear controlsettings are shut off when theignition is turned off and return tothe automatic settings. They must bereset when the ignition is turned onagain.

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Rear Climate Control, Climate Control Sensors

Using the Rear A/C Unit Climate Control Sensors

Features

111

NOTE:

TEMPERATURE SENSORTEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTONS

FAN SPEED CONTROL DIAL

Playing the Radio

112

U.S. models

(With Rear Entertainment System) (Without Rear Entertainment System)

AM/FM BUTTON TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

TUNE KNOBPWR/VOLKNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK BAR SEEK BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

Playing the RadioF

eatures

113

Canadian models


SCAN BUTTON SEEK BAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

－

－

＋－

－

－

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last turned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button, thenrelease it.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

You can use these five methods tofind radio stations on a selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station that you want to listento, press the SCAN button again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Play the Radio

TUNE

SEEK Preset

To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

SCAN

Playing the Radio

114

－

－

－

－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find stations, thenstore them in the preset buttons asdescribed previously.

press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Adjust the Balance,or side-to-side strength of the sound.

Adjust the Fader, or thefront-to-back strength of the sound.

Adjust the Treble in thesound.

Adjust the Bass in thesound.

On models with navigation system,push and hold the TUNE button for5 seconds to display information onthe navigation screen.

Press the TUNE knob repeatedly todisplay Bass, Treble, Balance, andFader settings. Turn the TUNE knobto adjust the setting. The indicatorson the display will show you theadjustable range. The system willreturn to the audio display in about 5seconds.

To turn off Auto Select,AUTO SELECT

Adjusting the SoundBALANCE

FADER

TREBLE

BASS

Playing the RadioF

eatures

115

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Your vehicle’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.

How well your vehicle’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, andatmospheric conditions.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

76

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Radio Reception

116

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio ReceptionF

eatures

117

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

118


XM RADIO BUTTON TUNE KNOBPWR/VOL KNOB

DISP/MODEBUTTON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

TUNE KNOBPWR/VOL KNOB XM RADIO BUTTON

DISP/MODEBUTTON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTONSCAN BUTTON

－

○ ○ －

－

－＋

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

To switch between thechannel mode and the categorymode, press and hold the DISP/MODE button until the modechanges. On models with navigationsystem, touch the MODE icon on theaudio display.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

On models with navigation system,push and hold the TUNE button for5 seconds to display XM informationon the navigation screen.

In thecategory mode, press either buttonto select another category.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

To listen to satellite radio, turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY(I) orON (II). Push the PWR/VOL knobto turn on the audio system, andpress the XM button. Adjust thevolume by turning the PWR/VOLknob. The last channel you listenedto will show in the display.


Operating the Satellite Radio

MODE

CATEGORY ( or )

TUNE

Features

119

－－

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem). The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for a fewseconds, then selects the nextchannel. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the button or touch the iconagain.

To store a channel:

To store a channel:

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton (icon) to tune to it.

The presets will be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons or preset icons (on modelswith navigation system). Each buttonstores one channel from the XM1band and one channel from the XM2band.

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel.

In the category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In the channel mode, all channelscan be selected.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.


SCANPreset

120

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)F

eatures

121

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the south side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in the tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.If your XM Radio service has expired

or you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM button. Avariety of music types and styles willplay.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated,‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear inthe display, and you’ll be able tolisten to XM Radio broadcasts. XMRadio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

Cargo may be attached to roofrack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com


Receiving Satellite Radio Service

122

Playing a CDF

eatures

123

U.S. models

(With Rear Entertainment System)

PWR/VOL KNOB CD BUTTONCD SLOT

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTONCD LOADBUTTON

CD LOADBUTTON

CD EJECT BUTTONCD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTONSKIPBUTTONS

SKIPBUTTONS

CD EJECT BUTTON

(Without Rear Entertainment System)

Playing a CD

124

Canadian models


CD LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT

RANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

CD BUTTON

CD EJECT BUTTON CD LOAD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

SKIPBUTTONS

CD BUTTON

CD EJECT BUTTONCD SLOT

SKIPBUTTONS

RANDOM BUTTON

－

－

＋－

－＋

－

Press the eject button to remove theCD. If you eject the CD, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the CDafter 15 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT/REPEATin the display. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activateRandom Play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. Press the RDM buttonagain to return to normal play.

Press the AM or FM button (AM/FM button on the U.S. models) toswitch to the radio while a CD isplaying.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or skip button.

Each time you press andrelease the skip button the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release theskip button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the track playing isshown in the display. The system willcontinuously play a CD until youchange modes.

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way and begin to play it.

CONTINUED

Premium model onlyTo Play a CD

To Stop Playing a CD

REPEAT

RANDOM

SKIP

Playing a CDF

eatures

125

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep, then releasethe button.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the Load button.

On the left side of the display, theCD Loaded indicator for an emptyposition will begin blinking.

When you see LOAD in thedisplay, insert the disc into the CDslot. Insert it only about halfway,the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way. You will again see thedashes in the display as the CD isloaded.

When LOAD appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot. Do not try to insert adisc until LOAD appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for 10 seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

The audio system on your vehiclehas an in-dash CD changer thatholds up to six discs.To load CDs or operate CD changer,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.Touring Model

CD Changer

Loading CDs in the Changer

126

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds and beginplaying it.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject up to six discs, one at atime.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display. Thesystem automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after 10seconds the system begins playingthe next disc in the changer. If thechanger is empty, the system selectsthe previous mode (AM, FM, or XMradio).

If you press the Eject button whilelistening to the radio, XM radio, orwith the audio system turned off, thedisc that was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe Eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (theCD Loaded indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

Removing CDs from the Changer

CD ChangerF

eatures

127

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

128

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in thefollowing charts. If you cannot clearthe error message, take the vehicleto your dealer.

Error Messages Cause Solution

Disc changermalfunction.High temperature.

Disc changermalfunction.High temperature.

See your dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.See your dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Changer Error MessagesF

eatures

129

▲ ▼The middle button adjusts thevolume up ( ) or down ( ). Pressthe top or bottom of the button andhold it until the desired volume isreached, then release it.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

use theCH button to change stations. Eachtime you press this button, thesystem advances to the next presetstation on the band you are listeningto. You will see the number of theselected preset button in the display.To change bands, or to change fromFM1 to FM2, press the AM/FMbutton.

the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push the CHbutton. You will see the disc andtrack number in the display.

The MODE button changes theaudio mode between FM1, FM2, AM,CD, and DVD/AUX, and XM (if adisc is inserted).

The CH button has three functions,depending on whether you arelistening to the radio, or playing aCD.

If you are listening to the radio,

If you are playing a CD,

Steering Wheel Controls

130

CH BUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

MODEBUTTON

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe Preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘Code’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the Presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is located on the radio codecard included in your Owner’sManual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, an Acuradealer can access your code withyour radio’s serial number. Toaccess the serial number, turn theradio on. It must display ‘‘COdE’’,then turn the radio off. Push thepreset 1, preset 6, and power buttonsat the same time, then quicklyrelease.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost when thepower was disconnected.

If you should happen to lose the card,you must obtain the code numberfrom your dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

131

Rear Entertainment System

132

(U.S. models) (Canadian models)

REAR PWRBUTTON

REARCONTROLOFF ICON

REPEATBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

PAUSEBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

REAR SPEAKEROFF ICON

REAR PWRBUTTON

REAR SPEAKEROFF ICON

REPEATBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

PAUSEBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

RANDOMBUTTON

REARCONTROLOFF ICON

REAR CTRLSELECTORKNOB

REAR CTRLSELECTORKNOB

The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display.You must select another source.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off. You will see the RearSpeakers Off icon in the display. Thesound for the rear system is sent tothe wireless headphones.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (AM/FMradio, XM radio, CD changer, DVDplayer or AUX) than the front seatoccupants. The audio is broadcastthrough the supplied wirelessheadphones.

Press the REAR PWR button. Toturn on the rear controls (ceilingpanel or remote), press the REARCTRL knob. The system’s iconshows in the right side display. Yourpassengers can then operate the rearsystem with the control panel in theceiling or with the remote control.Press the REAR CTRL knob again toturn the rear controls off. You willsee the Rear Controls Off icon in theright display.

If equipped Rear SpeakersTo Turn On the System

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

133

NOTE:

＊

＊

The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can play DVDvideo discs and CDs. It featuresDolby noise reduction.

To play the radio or XM radio, thebuttons for the front entertainmentsystem have the same functions.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDchanger, select CD/CHG. If the CDis loaded in the lower player, selectDVD/AUX.

Open the overhead screen bypushing on the button. The screenwill swing down part-way. Pivot thescreen the rest of the way (to detentone or two). If you pivot the screentoo far forward, past detent three,the display will turn off. Pivot thescreen back to the detent to turn thedisplay back on. To close the screen,pivot it up until it latches.

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, turn theREAR CTRL knob clockwise. Theamber RR LED comes on to showthat the control panel is enabled.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel


134

REAR CONTROL PANEL

BUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

－

－

＋

－

－

－＋

－

Push the disc in halfway, the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.

Press the PLAY buttonif the DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Press the PAUSE buttonto pause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release theside of the bar to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track orchapter. Press it again to skip to the

beginning of the previous track orchapter.

Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the RRCTRL knob counterclockwise.Press and hold the

side to move forward; you will see‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and holdthe side to move backward; youwill see ‘‘REV’’ in the display.Release the bar when the systemreaches the point you want.

Insert a DVD or CD into the DVDplayer below the front panel.

Turn the REAR CTRL knobclockwise. The amber RR LED willcome on to show that the controlpanel is now enabled.

PLAY

PAUSEEJECT

To Return to Front AudioControls

SEEK/SKIP


eatures

135

DVD SLOT EJECT BUTTON

Use these buttons to select theentertainment source (radio, XMradio, CD changer, or DVD player/Auxiliary device). The selectedsource will be shown in the display.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the REARCTRL knob on the front panel.

Use the and buttons toselect from the stations on the radiopreset buttons. Pressing the or

button will cause the system tosearch up or down the band for astation with a strong signal. You willsee SEEK in the display.

When the display is open,use the manual controls to selecticons from the menu.

Using the Rear Control Panel

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel


136

NOTE:

SOURCE SELECTION BUTTONS

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

CH/DISKBUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

PLAY/PAUSE/PROG BUTTON ENTER BUTTON CH/DISK BUTTON

REAR CONTROLSOFF INDICATOR

－

－

－

▲

▼▲

▼

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track. If thechanger is selected, use the and

buttons to change discs.

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Pressthis button when you want to pausethe DVD. Press this button again togo back to PLAY.

Press thebutton to skip to the beginning

of the next chapter. Press thebutton to skip back to the

beginning of the current chapter.

To select the menuon the DVD, press the MENUbutton. Use the , , ,and buttons to move to thedesired menu selection, then pressthe ENT button to enter yourselection.

If a CD is loaded in the main CDchanger, select it by pressing theCD/CHG button. If the CD is loadedin the DVD player, press the DVD/AUX button.

To Play a CD from the RearControl Panel

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel

PLAY/PAUSE/PROG

SEEK/SKIP

MENU/ENT


eatures

137

You can use the remote control toselect the entertainment source(radio, CD player, or DVD player/Auxiliary device). The selectedsource will be shown in the display.

Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the RRCTRL knob on the front panel.When using the remote control,point it at the rear control panel inthe ceiling.

The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, SKIP,and FWD/REW buttons work thesame function as the front and rearcontrol panel buttons.

The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, SKIP,and FWD/REW buttons work thesame function as the front and rearcontrol panel buttons.

Using the Remote Control

To Play a CD or Radio

To Play a DVD


138

SOURCE SELECTIONBUTTONS

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

DISP BUTTON

POWER (T/C) BUTTON

REW/FWD BUTTONS

STOP BUTTON

PAUSE BUTTON

TITLE/CAPTER BUTTON

SET-UP BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

RETURN BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

XM MODE BUTTON

－

－

－－

▼▲

Press this buttonto stop playing a DVD.

Some DVDs have menus that allowyou to select a dubbed language,subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.The menu contents will vary fromDVD to DVD.

Use the , , , andbuttons to select the desired

menu option. Then press ENT toenter your selection. Use the

and buttons to changepages. You can also use thenumbered buttons to enter the two-digit number of a menu option. Youdo not have to press ENT. Press thebutton again to close the window.

To change thecolor, contrast, aspect ratio, andbrightness of the video screen, pressthe DISP button. The current settingof one will be displayed on thescreen each time you press thebutton. Use the and

buttons to change the settingas desired. The display will disappearfrom the screen several secondsafter you stop adjusting the setting.

In the MENUselection mode, pressing theRETURN button for less than 2seconds changes the MENU displayto the previous page. Pressing theRETURN button for more than 2seconds while a DVD is playingbrings the system into the TITLEenter mode. When you enter yourselection, the DVD player will startplaying from the selected title.

STOP Button

MENU and TITLE Buttons

DISP Button RETURN Button


eatures

139

The remote control uses twoAA batteries. To replace thebatteries, put a coin in the notch onthe back. Turn it one-quarter, thenslide the cover off. Remove the oldbatteries. Make sure the polarity ofthe new batteries is correct whenyou install them. Slide the cover onuntil it locks.

When you are not using the remotecontrol, store it in holder in the frontseat-back pocket.

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.


This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries

Storing the Remote Control


140

HOLDER

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be playedin this system.

If you see an error message in the display while operating the DVD player,find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error, or aDVD has been loaded inthe CD player

High Temperature

Low Vehicle BatteryVoltage

Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the DVDPlayer. Make sure the DVD is not scratched ordamaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.Check it for damage or deformation.If the DVD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the DVD isejected, see your dealer.Do not try to force the DVD out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Run the engine to recharge the battery.

Playable DVDs DVD Player Error Messages


eatures

141

Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward, and pivot it out ofthe way.

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. The antennasare in the front of the earpieces. Ifyou wear the headphones backwards,the antennas will be aimed awayfrom the system, affecting the soundquality and range.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward, and theheadphones turn off. When not inuse, store the headphones in thepocket of either front seat.

Replacing BatteriesWireless Headphones


142

TABVOLUME DIAL

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.

Some video game power suppliesmay cause poor picture quality.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack

Auxiliary input jacks and wiredheadphone jacks for the rearentertainment system are under thethird seat armrest on the passenger’sside. To access these jacks, open thecover by pulling up on the lever.

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpice as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.

CONTINUED

Auxiliary Input Jacks


eatures

143

ARMREST LEVER

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

COVER

BATTERY

There are three wired headphonejacks for the third seat passengers.Each jack has its own volume control.These headphones are not suppliedwith the vehicle.


144

VOLUME DIALS

HEADPHONE JACKS

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Tailgate OpenMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ) to see if the doors andtailgate are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door or the tailgatewithout using the key or the remotetransmitter, or the hood, will cause itto alarm. It also alarms if the radio,navigation and DVD components areremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

Use the remote transmitterto quickly check that the hood,tailgate and all doors are closed.Push the lock button twice. Thereshould be an audible confirmationbeep.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

62

Security SystemF

eatures

145

NOTE:

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. Indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on to show thesystem is now activated.

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch. The indicator in the switchwill come on.

The cruise control may not holdthe set speed when you are goingup and down hills. If your speedincreases going down a hill, usethe brakes to slow down. This willcancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panelwill come back on.

1.

2.

3.

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

146

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH

CANCEL

RESUME/ACCEL

SET/DECEL

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/ACCEL button. When you reachthe desired cruising speed, releasethe button.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, and press the SET/DECELbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

147

NOTE:

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.Push the cruise control masterbutton.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the systemwill remember the previously setcruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RESUME/ACCELbutton. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator comes on. The vehicle willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed.

Cancelling the Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

148

－

＋

Trip ComputerF

eatures

149

INSTANTANEOUSFUEL MILEAGE

CLOCKBUTTON

TRIPBUTTON

RESETBUTTON

DISPLAY BRIGHTNESSCONTROL

/CALIBRATE BUTTON

/ZONE BUTTONRESET, SET BUTTON

COMPASS

OUTSIDETEMPERATURE

CLOCK

Clock

Direction of travel

Outside temperature

Instantaneous fuel mileage

The Avg display shows you theaverage fuel economy since youlast reset the display.

The E/T is the elapsed time thatthe ignition has been on. Itautomatically resets to 0.0 when itreaches twelve hours. This displaycan be reset at any time.

The display also has manualfunctions for the Climate ControlSystem. Refer to page .

All models of MDX have a tripcomputer. To operate the tripcomputer on models with thenavigation system, refer to thenavigation manual.

The Trip Computer displays thefollowing information.

The temperature sensor is locatedin the front bumper, and can beaffected by heat from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from the surroundingtraffic. Because of theseconditions, it may take a while forthe temperature to read correctly.

The Range, or estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank estimatedfrom the fuel economy you havegotten over the last several miles(kilometers).

The Trip display shows you thetotal distance you have drivensince it was last reset.

Press the TRIP button to show eitherthe range and Avg fuel economy, orthe E/T and Trip odometer.

To reset the Avg fuel economy, E/T,and Trip odometer, press and holdthe RESET button until you hear abeep.

The outside temperature, fueleconomy, range, and trip odometercan be displayed in either English orMetric units. To change betweenunits, press the TRIP button andhold it for five seconds.

106

(Without Navigation System)

Changing and Resetting theDisplay

Changing Units of Measurement

Trip Computer

150

To set the clock:

Push the CLOCK button. Thehours digits will start blinking. Ifyou want to only set the minutes,go to step 4.

To change the hours to a lowernumber, press and hold theMODE button. To change thehours to a higher number, pressand hold the A/C button.

When the hours reach the desirednumber, release the button.

To set the minutes, press theCLOCK button again. Theminutes digits will start blinking.

Use the MODE or A/C button toset the minutes to the desirednumber.

Press the CLOCK button again.The clock will return to its normaldisplay.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Press the CLOCKbutton, then press the RESET button.If the displayed time is before thehalf hour, it will reset back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, it will resetforward to the next hour.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Setting the Clock

Trip ComputerF

eatures

151

－－

－－

－－

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to be continuallyshowing the wrong direction and isnot self-calibrating, do the following.

You should do this procedurein an open area, away from buildings,power lines, and other vehicles.

Press and hold the CLOCK andTRIP buttons until the displaychanges (about 1 second).

Press the Calibrate (MODE)button.

Press the Set (FAN) button.‘‘Calibrate’’ will start blinking, andthe direction display will change to‘‘ ’’.

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

When the display goes from‘‘ ’’ to an actual heading, theunit is calibrated.

Press the CLOCK, TRIP, orRESET button to complete thecalibration and return the displayto normal.

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

If you see ‘‘ ’’ in the directiondisplay and ‘‘Calibrate’’ is blinking,the compass is self-calibrating.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Compass Operation

Compass Calibration

Trip Computer

152

NOTE:

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone set into the compass, do thefollowing.

Press and hold the CLOCK andTRIP buttons until the displaychanges (about 1 second).

Press the Zone (A/C) button. Thezone the compass is currently setto is displayed.

Find the zone for your area on themap.

If the zone is incorrect, press andhold the MODE button to get thenumber to count down, or the A/Cbutton to get the number to countup. If the zone is correct, continueto step 5.

Press the Set (FAN) button to setthe zone selection.

Press the CLOCK, TRIP orRESET button to exit the zoneselection and return display tonormal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Compass Zone Selection

Trip ComputerF

eatures

153

Trip Computer

154

The Brightness control has sevenpositions. In the middle five positionsthe display will dim when you turnon the parking lights or headlights.

Moving the control to the far leftposition turns off the display. It willcome back on for several seconds ifyou press any of the buttons.In the far right (maximumbrightness) position, the display willnot dim when you turn on theparking lights.

Always use a soft cloth and mildglass/plastic cleaner (such ascleaners for computer monitorscreens) to clean the display.

Whenever you shift to R (Reverse)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.

For the best picture, always keep therear view camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens.

When in reverse, the touch screen,and Navi ‘‘hard’’ buttons are lockedout, except the A/C-INFO button.Touching the A/C-INFO buttonallows you to adjust the brightness ofthe rear view camera image. Touchthe A/C-INFO button again to leavethe brightness adjust mode.

The camera brightnesscannot be adjusted by voice control.

Since the rear view camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

When you wipe the screen, someblack lines may appear because ofstatic electricity build-up. This isnormal. They will disappear in 5 to10 minutes.

Navigation modelsBRIGHTNESS control

Cleaning the Display

Rear View Camera and Monitor

Trip Computer, Rear View Camera and MonitorF

eatures

155

NOTE:

REAR VIEW CAMERA

－The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety featurethat causes the motor to stop and

reverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinkTransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

General Information

Training HomeLink


HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Before you begin

156

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

The remote controlyou are training from may stoptransmitting after 2 seconds. This isnot long enough for HomeLink tolearn the code. Release and press thebutton on the remote control every 2seconds until HomeLink has learnedthe code.

The red indicator in HomeLinkshould begin flashing. It will flashslowly at first, then rapidly.

When the red indicator flashesrapidly, release both buttons.HomeLink should have learnedthe code from the remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it. If the buttondoes not work, repeat theprocedure to train it again. If it stilldoes not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink button you just trained.If the red indicator blinks for 2seconds then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotelycontrolled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

2.

3.

4.1.

5.

6.

7.

158

Canadian Owners:

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

157

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

158

TRAINING BUTTON

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.




Erasing Codes Customer Assistance

Retraining a Button

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

159

Your vehicle is equipped with theHandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL usesBluetooth technology as a wirelesslink between it and your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. When you arein your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy safe,hands-free phone use. The HFL isavailable only in English.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while making a call,the HFL over-rides the audio system.To change the volume level, use theaudio system volume knob.

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooh SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

To use the HFL, your phone musthave Bluetooth capability along withthe Hands Free Profile. This type ofphone is available through manyphone makers and cellular carriers.You can also find a phone by visiting

In Canada, visit

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

Here are the main components ofthe HFL system:

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front map lightsand the console buttons. On modelswith navigation system, themicrophone is shared with thenavigation system.

162

162

www.acura.com.www.acura.ca.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Audio System

Phonebook

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Microphone

HandsFreeLink

160

TM

－

＊

＊

Here is the function of each HFLbutton:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTALK/BACK button on the left sideof the steering wheel.

Phone Indicates a phone iscurrently linked to the HFL.

This information is displayedwhether or not the phone is beingused:

Touring model with Navigation System

CONTINUED

HFL Buttons

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

161

Refer to your navigation systemManual.

SIGNALSTLENGTH

ROAM STATUS

NAVIGATION SYSTEM BUTTON

HFL TALK/BCK BUTTON

PHONE

TM

＊

＊

－

－

＊

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

All phones may notoperate identically, and some maycause inconsistent operation of theHFL.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

Signal Strength (models withoutnavigation system) Indicatesthe network signal strength of thecurrent phone call. Five barsequals full signal strength.

ROAM Status (models withoutnavigation system) Indicatesyour phone is roaming.

Some phones will not send thisinformation to the HFL.

The HFL is operated by the HFLTALK/BACK button on the left sideof the steering wheel. The next fewpages provide easy-to-useinstructions for all basic features ofthe HFL.

To enter a command, press the topof the TALK/BACK button. Then,after the beep, say your commandin a clear, natural tone.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize the

command a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the top of theTALK/BACK button, wait for thebeep, and say, ‘‘Hands free linkhelp.’’

For best system operation, set theclimate control fan speed to low,and direct the center vents awayfrom the microphone in the ceiling.

:

How to Use the HFL

Using Voice Control

HandsFreeLink

162

NOTE:

TM

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the top of the TALK/BACKbutton, the HFL begins listeningfrom the point at which it timedout.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you press

the Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’The next time you press the Talkbutton, the HFL begins from itsmain menu.

The HFL will accept a numeric, four-digit passcode that you can use forsecurity purposes.

With the ignition in the ON (II)position, press and release the topof the TALK/BACK button on thesteering wheel. After the beep, say‘‘Security.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Security options are lock, unlock,and set passcode.’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Set passcode.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew four-digit passcode?’’ (If youare changing the passcode, youwill first be asked for the currentpasscode.)Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After the

beep, say the four-digit passcodeyou want to use. For example, say‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘The new passcodehas been stored. Returning to themain menu.’’

Once a passcode is set, you can lockthe HFL so it only operates after thepasscode is entered, or you canunlock it so anyone using yourvehicle can also use the HFL.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Security.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Security options arelock, unlock, and set passcode.’’

2.

1.

4.

5.

3.1.

To set your passcode, do this:

To lock or unlock the HFL, do this:

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Setting Your Passcode

Locking or Unlocking the HFL

Features

163

TM

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Lock’’ or ‘‘Unlock.’’Lock means the HFL will promptyou for your passcode each timethe ignition switch is turned to ON(II) and you press the Talk button.You will only be asked for thepasscode once per ignition cycle. Ifthe HFL is locked, its response is‘‘System is locked. Each time thevehicle is turned on, the passcodewill be required to use the system.’’If the HFL is unlocked, itsresponse is ‘‘The system isunlocked. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘System.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘System options aresetup and clear.’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like maleor female prompts?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Male’’ or ‘‘Female,’’depending on the system voiceyou want. The HFL response is,‘‘Male (Female) prompts havebeen selected. Would you like anaudible notification of an incoming

call?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt.’’If you choose ‘‘Ring tone’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘Youhave an incoming call.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. If you say‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the HFLresponse is, ‘‘Would you like a ringtone or a prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’after the beep, the HFL returns toits main menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ willresult in no ring tone or promptplayback during an incoming call.The audio system will still mute,and a message will be displayed.

2.

1.

4.

5.

3.

2.

To set up the system, do this:

Setting Up the System

HandsFreeLink

164

TM

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone set up optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free call.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.

The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, or talk to yourphone retailer.During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘The pairing processrequires operation of your mobilephone. For safety, only performthis function while the vehicle isstopped. State a four-digit code forpairing. Note this code. It will berequested by the phone.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the four-digit code youwant to use. For example, say ‘‘1, 2,3, 4.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘1, 2, 3,4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone.’’

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Search mode. Thephone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

1. 4.

5.

6.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Pairing Your Phone

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

165

NOTE: NOTE:

TM

To delete a paired phone, do this:To rename a paired phone, do this:Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name you want touse. For example, say ‘‘Eric’sphone.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Which phone wouldyou like to edit?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name of the phoneyou want to rename. For example,say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘What is the newname for Eric’s phone?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the new name of thephone. For example, say ‘‘Lisa’sphone.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Which phone wouldyou like to delete?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name of the phoneyou want to delete. For examplesay ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like todelete Eric’s phone?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Preparing to deleteEric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

2.

3.

4.

1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

7.

8.

HandsFreeLink

166

TM

To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:

To list all paired phones, do this:

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. If you say‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The phone has beendeleted. Returning to the mainmenu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’ or‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Searching for thenext phone.’’ The HFL thendisconnects the linked phone andsearches for another paired phone.If no other phones are found, thefirst phone remains linked.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘List.’’ The HFLresponds by listing the name ofeach paired phone. When allphones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An example ofthe HFL response is, ‘‘Eric’s phoneis linked. Battery strength is threebars. Signal strength is five bars,and the phone is roaming.Returning to the main menu.’’

2.1.

1.

2.

1.

5.

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

167

TM

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe top of the TALK/BACKbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘What name or number would youlike to call/dial?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.To end the call, press the bottomof the TALK/BACK button.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe top of the TALK/BACKbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What name or number would youlike to call/dial?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the number you want tocall. For example, say ‘‘123 4567891.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘123456 7891. Say call, dial, or continueto add numbers.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name you want tocall. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’ The

HFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The topof the TALK/BACK response is‘‘Calling’’ or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.To end the call, press the bottomof the TALK/BACK button.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release the topof the TALK/BACK button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Redial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Redialing.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear the personyou called through the audiospeakers. To change the volume, usethe audio system volume knob.

1.

3.

3.

1.

2.

2.

4.

4.

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

Making a Call

HandsFreeLink

168

TM

The HFL allow you to send numbersor names during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem. You can also programaccount numbers into the HFLphonebook for easy retrieval duringmenu-driven calls.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the number you want tosend. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’The HFL response is ‘‘1, 2, 3. Saysend, or continue to add numbers.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The dial toneswill be sent, and the call willcontinue.

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe top of the TALK/BACK buttonand begin speaking. If you don’t wantto answer the call, press the Backbutton.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The dial toneswill be sent, and the call willcontinue.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name you want tosend. For example, say ‘‘Accountnumber.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to send accountnumber?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’ If your phone has Call Waiting, and

you receive a call when you are onthe phone, press the Talk button toanswer it. When you do this, theoriginal call is placed on hold. Toreturn to the original call, press thetop of the TALK/BACK buttonagain. If you don’t want to answerthe new call, disregard it, andcontinue with your original call. Ifyou want to hang up the original calland answer the new call, press thebottom of the TALK/BACK button.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this:

To send a name during a call, do this:

Receiving a CallSending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

169

TM

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After the beep,say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The audio switchesfrom the HFL to the phone.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After the beep,say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The audio switchesfrom your phone to the HFL.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phonebook optionsare store, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Mute is cancelled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name wouldyou like to store?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name you would liketo store. For example, say ‘‘Eric’’or say ‘‘account number.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the number. Forexample, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘123 456 7891.’’

3.

1.

2.

4.

2.

1.

To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

Transferring a Call

Muting a Call

Setting up the Phonebook

HandsFreeLink

170

TM

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name wouldyou like to edit?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name you would liketo edit. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew number for Eric?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the new number for Eric.For example, say ‘‘987 654 3219.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘987 6543219.’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘The number has beenchanged. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name wouldyou like to delete?’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say the name you would liketo delete. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Do youwant to delete Eric?’’Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘The name has beendeleted. Returning to the mainmenu.’’


Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Phonebook optionsare store, edit, delete, and list.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘The Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

2.

1.

4. 3.

4.5.

1.

2.

1.

3.

5.

To edit the number of a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

171

TM

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘List.’’ The HFLresponds by listing the names inthe phonebook. When the end ofthe list is reached, the HFLresponse is, ‘‘The entire list hasbeen read. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘List.’’ The HFLresponds by listing the names inthe phonebook. When it says thename you want to call, for example,Eric, press the top of the TALK/BACK button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Would you

like to call Eric?’’ Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘This process willclear all paired phones, clear allentries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’


Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘System.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘System options aresetup and clear.’’

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,and all names in the HFL phonebook.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

Press and release the top of theTALK/BACK button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Preparing to clear allpaired phones, all phonebookentries, and the passcode. Thismay take up to 2 minutes tocomplete.’’ Press and release thetop of the TALK/BACK button.After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ toproceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or‘‘Cancel.’’If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

2.

3.

4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

To clear the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Clearing the System

172

TM

The OnStar system in your vehiclegives you access to a wide range ofservices and information with thetouch of a button. An OnStar advisoris available 24 hours a day, 7 days aweek.The Safe and Sound Plan providesthese features:

Roadside AssistanceEmergency ServicesAutomatic Notification of AirbagDeploymentAccident AssistRemote Door Locking/UnlockingStolen Vehicle TrackingMisplaced Vehicle AssistanceOnline Concierge Services.

The Directions and ConnectionsPlan provides these additionalfeatures:

Route SupportRide AssistInformation and ConvenienceServices

The Luxury and Leisure Plan addspersonal concierge services.

The OnStar buttons and indicatorare located on the ceiling near thefront map lights.

U.S. Touring model with NavigationSystem

OnStar Control Panel

OnStarF

eatures

173

EMERGENCY BUTTON

SYSTEMSTATUSINDICATOR

CALL ANSWER/CALL END BUTTON

OnStarBUTTON

VOICEACTIVATEDKEYPAD

Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor. You will hear achime, followed by theannouncement, ‘‘Connecting toOnStar.’’ The connection should take20 to 30 seconds. The advisor willassist you with any of the servicesincluded in your plan.

Depending on what service yourequest, you may need to give yourPersonal Identification Number(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is anumber you make up and providewhen you establish your OnStarservice.

If cellular telephone service is notavailable in the area you are drivingin, you will hear a fast busy signal.The system will retry the connectionseveral times before returning to theready mode.

A microphone is located on theceiling, between the front map lightsand the console buttons you canspeak to the advisor without takingyour hands off the steering wheel ordiverting your attention from theroad. The OnStar advisor’s voicecomes from the audio system’sspeakers. Use the volume control onthe audio system or on the steeringwheel to adjust the volume.

You can record up to 5 minutes ofinformation from your OnStaradvisor or the Virtual Advisor. Thisis helpful for reviewing the route,hotel, or restaurant information youreceive from the OnStar center.

To record a message:During your call, the Advisor orVirtual Advisor, press and releasethe OnStar button. The systembeeps to indicate that it isrecording.When you are finished recording,press and release the OnStarbutton again. The system beepsand stops recording.

To hear the first playback of amessage:

Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ Therecorded message is playedthrough the audio systemspeakers.

To cancel these retries, press theCALL ANSWER/CALL END button.

Press the CALL ANSWER/CALLEND button. The system respondswith ‘‘OnStar replay.’’

When you are finished listening,press the CALL ANSWER/CALLEND button. The system respondswith ‘‘Goodbye.’’

OnStar Services Button

Recording an Advisor or VirtualAdvisor Message

OnStar

174

♯－

To hear a message again:

Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ Thesystem responds with ‘‘Play orResume.’’If you say ‘‘Play,’’ the messageplays from the beginning. If yousay ‘‘Resume,’’ the message playsfrom the point you previouslystopped it.

Recording a new message will deletethe previous message.

Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor only if you have anemergency situation. You will hear atone, followed by the announcement,‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’Your call is given highest priority.

The advisor will ask about the natureof the emergency, locate yourvehicle, and notify the appropriateemergency service agencies.

Press the ‘‘phone ’’ button to senddial tones (example automatedphone systems) while in an OnStarpersonal call.

Press the CALL ANSWER/CALLEND button. The system respondswith ‘‘OnStar replay.’’

Press this CALL ANSWER/CALLEND button to end a call to theOnStar advisor. If the OnStar centercalls you, press this button to answerthe call.

This button is also used to initiatethe Personal Calling and VirtualAdvisor services, if you havesubscribed.

Emergency Button

Call Answer/Call EndButton

Voice Activated Keypad

OnStarF

eatures

175

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

If you are ever in anaccident that causes the airbags todeploy, the OnStar systemautomatically places a call (providedthe OnStar system and your vehicle’selectrical system are still intact). Theadvisor will attempt to speak to youto evaluate the situation, and contactthe nearest emergency servicesprovider.

The OnStaradvisor can help you if you are everin a minor accident by asking you forinformation about the accident.Complete, detailed information willmake it easier to complete accidentreports and insurance claims.

The OnStar system uses the GlobalPositioning System (GPS) to locateyour vehicle whenever you place acall. This allows the advisor toquickly contact the nearest serviceswithout requiring you to providedetailed directions.

Contactthe OnStar advisor if you needassistance with a problem (flat tire,out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. Theadvisor will contact an appropriateagency to come and assist you.

Contact anOnStar advisor if you have anemergency situation. The advisorwill contact the nearest emergencyservices provider (ambulance, firedepartment, etc.) and advise them ofyour situation.

This indicator shows you the statusof the system.

The system is readyfor use.

A call is inprogress.

There is a problemwith the system. Press the OnStarbutton to contact an advisor. If thecall connects, the advisor will assistyou with verifying the system’soperation. If you are not able tocontact an advisor, take your vehicleto an Acura dealer to have thesystem diagnosed.

There is a problemwith the system while a call is inprogress.

Automatic Notif ication of AirbagDeployment

Accident Assist

Safe and Sound Plan Features

Roadside Assistance

Emergency Services

System Status Indicator

Solid Green

Blinking Green

Solid Red

Blinking Red

OnStar

176

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The OnStar advisor cangive you information on nearbyhotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,gas stations, and many otherservices in any area you are travelingin. The advisor can also help youwith hotel or restaurant reservations.

If you need a ride(taxi, limousine service, etc.) theOnStar advisor can make thearrangements for you. Use theOnStar button, or call(888) 4-ONSTAR.

The OnStaradvisor can give you verbaldirections from your current locationto a desired destination.

The Directions and ConnectionsPlan provides these additionalfeatures.

By sending a signal to yourvehicle, the advisor can lock orunlock your vehicle’s doors. This ishelpful if you are away from yourvehicle and realize you forgot to lockthe doors, or if you have locked thekeys in your vehicle. To get OnStar’sassistance, call (888) 4-ONSTAR(466-7827).

UsingGPS, OnStar can locate your vehiclealmost anywhere. If your vehicle isever stolen, contact OnStar at (888)4-ONSTAR. The advisor will put youin contact with the proper authorities,and assist them with locating yourvehicle.

If you are unable to locate yourvehicle in a large parking lot orparking structure, contact OnStar at(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor willremotely activate the exterior lightsand the horn, allowing you to locateyour vehicle.

From your computer, you can loginto www. myonstar.com to makedinner reservations, purchase ticketsto events, send flowers, etc.

Information and ConvenienceServices

Ride Assist

Route Support

Directions and Connections PlanFeatures

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking

Stolen Vehicle Tracking

Misplaced Vehicle Assistance

Online Concierge Services

OnStarF

eatures

177

－

－

The Luxury and Leisure planprovides all the benefits of the otherplans, and adds:

An OnStar advisor can assist youwith purchasing theater tickets,airline tickets, rental car reservationsfor a vacation, and just about anyother purchase you desire.

The OnStar Personal Calling plan isan extra-cost option that gives youthe ability to use your vehicle’sOnStar system as a hands-freecellular telephone.

To sign up for Personal Calling,press the OnStar button in yourvehicle, and notify the advisor thatyou’d like to sign up. The advisor willget all the information needed to setup your account, and provide youwith your new cellular telephonenumber.You will need to provide a credit cardnumber, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ orminutes of air time (one unit equals1 minute).

Youmust use voice commands to givethe OnStar system your callinginformation. To make a phone call:

Press the CALL ANSWER/CALLEND button.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing.’’It will then place the telephone call.When you have finished yourconversation, press the CALLANSWER/CALL END buttonagain to hang up.

Say ‘‘Yes’’ to dial the number, or‘‘No’’ to try again.

OnStar will repeat the number,and then say ‘‘Yes or No.’’

Say the entire number withoutpausing.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phonenumber to dial, please.’’

Say ‘‘Dial.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’

Luxury and Leisure PlanFeatures

Personal Concierge Services

Personal Calling Placing a Telephone Call

OnStar

178

If you need to cancel the phone callattempt before entering thecomplete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’The system will cancel the operationand return to Ready.

You can also enter the number onedigit at a time. To make a phone call:

If you make a mistake speaking adigit of the phone number, or thesystem responds with the wrongdigit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause thesystem to erase the last digit.

If you make a mistake speaking thephone number, or the systemresponds with the wrong number,say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause thesystem to erase the number.

If you need to cancel the phone callattempt before entering thecomplete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’The system will cancel the operationand return to Ready.


When you have finished yourconversation, press the CALLANSWER/CALL END buttonagain to hang up.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing.’’It will then place the telephone call.

Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’

OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the number.

OnStar will repeat that digit.Always wait for OnStar to confirmthe digit before going to the nextdigit.

Say the first digit of the number.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit to dial, please.’’

Say ‘‘Digit dial.’’


CONTINUED

OnStarF

eatures

179

－

－

－

－

－

If the system has difficultyunderstanding a voice command, itcan respond with:

‘‘Pardon’’ The system could notmatch your voice command to one itknows. Repeat the commanddistinctly.

‘‘Slower please’’ The systemmissed the command because it wasnot ready for it, or there was toomuch background noise. Repeat thecommand after a short pause.

Youcan send dial tones during OnStarPersonal Calling.

While in a personal call, press theVoice Activated Key-Pad Button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit to send please.’’Say the first digit of the numberyou want to send.OnStar will repeat that digit.Always wait for OnStar to confirm

the digit before going to the nextdigit.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the number.Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete number.Then say ‘‘Send.’’ OnStar will sendthe number by dial tones.

When someone places a telephonecall to you, the audio system willmute and you will hear the ring.Press the CALL ANSWER/CALLEND button to answer the call.When you have completed the call,press the CALL ANSWER/CALLEND button again to hang up.

The OnStar system can store up totwenty 32-digit telephone numbers inits memory. When you store thesenumbers in its memory, you giveeach one a nametag. When you wantto place a telephone call, you can

recall the number by giving thesystem the nametag.

To store atelephone number and its nametag inthe system:

Say the name that you wantassigned to that telephone number.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag, please.’’

Say ‘‘Yes,’’ or say ‘‘No’’ to try again.

OnStar will repeat the number,and then say ‘‘Yes or No.’’

Say the entire number.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phonenumber to store, please.’’

Say ‘‘Store.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’


Voice Activated Key-Pad

Incoming Telephone Calls

Using Nametags

Storing a Nametag

OnStar

180

－

＜＞

＜＞

－

＜＞

＜＞

＜＞

To delete aname tag and telephone numberfrom memory:

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Delete.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag, please.’’Say the name tag for the numberyou want to delete.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete

name tag , Yes or No.’’Say ‘‘Yes.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting

name tag .’’

Toplace a telephone call using a nametag:

You can also store a telephonenumber and its name tag one digit ata time. To store them in the system:

Press the VOICE ACTIVATEDKEYPAD button.

Say ‘‘New nametag.’’


Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Store’’ again.

Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the first digit of the number.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit to store, please.’’

Say ‘‘Digit store.’’


(or ‘‘No’’ to try again)OnStar will respond with ‘‘Storing

nametag .’’


If you have forgotten what nametags you have stored, the system willread them to you. Press the CALLANSWER/CALL END button. Whenthe system responds with ‘‘Ready,’’say ‘‘Directory.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Callingname tag ,’’ then place the

telephone call.

Say the name tag for the numberyou want to call.


Say ‘‘Call.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’


OnStar will respond with ‘‘Storenew nametag , Yes or No.’’

Say ‘‘Yes.’’

CONTINUED

Deleting a Name tagPlacing a Telephone Call

OnStarF

eatures

181

－

－＜＞

To redialthe last telephone number youcalled:

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’Say ‘‘Redial.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Redialing,’’ then place thetelephone call.

By giving the system a security codethat you make up, you can lock outthe Personal Calling and VirtualAdvisor capabilities of the system sounauthorized people cannot maketelephone calls. To turn security onor off:

You can also call OnStar at(888) 4-ONSTAR, or get informationabout your account at the OnStarweb site, www.onstar.com.

To purchase moreunits of cellular air time:

To find out how many units you haveremaining:

You must prepurchase units(minutes) of cellular air time. TheOnStar system tracks how manyunits you have remaining.

If you forget the security codeentered, or someone else enters asecurity code unknown to you, youmust contact an OnStar advisor toreset the code. Press the OnStarbutton, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.




It is also possible to press theOnstar button and talk to anadvisor to purchase more air time.

OnStar will connect you to anautomated system to handle yourpurchase.

Say ‘‘Add.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’

Say ‘‘Units.’’


OnStar will respond with ‘‘Youhave number units remaining.’’

Say ‘‘Verify.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’

Say ‘‘Units.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’


OnStar will respond with ‘‘Securityis ON/OFF.’’

Say the fourth digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the third digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the first digit of the code.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit of security code, please.’’

Say ‘‘Security.’’


Redialing a Number

Adding Units

Keeping Track of Units

Security Code

OnStar

182

If you do not have Internet access, adefault profile can be set up for you.

To use the Virtual Advisor from yourvehicle:

You make up and provide yourPersonal Identification Number(PIN) when you establish youraccount with OnStar. You shouldwrite down your PIN, and keep itwith you at all times.

You can change your PIN at any time.Contact the OnStar advisor bypressing the OnStar button, or bycalling (888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you forget your PIN, contact theOnStar advisor. For security reasons,your PIN will be mailed to you.

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’

If you would like to hear a list ofvoice commands that are available,say ‘‘What are my choices.’’ OnStaris continually upgrading the system,so new commands may becomeavailable.

The system will connect you to theVirtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisorwill prompt you for the informationyou desire.

Say ‘‘Virtual Advisor.’’

When you subscribe to PersonalCalling, you can also enjoy thebenefits of Virtual Advisor. Thisfeature lets you hear information inyour vehicle about weather, sports,news, and stocks.

Although Virtual Advisor canprovide information on manysubjects, you can set up acustomized profile with OnStar thatmakes it easier to get informationabout areas that are of specificinterest to you. To do this, you mustgo to the OnStar web site,www.onstar.com. This is a securesite; you will need your accountnumber and PIN to access youraccount information and to designyour customized profile.

OnStar Virtual Advisor Personal Identif ication Number

OnStarF

eatures

183

OnStar uses the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) to locate your vehiclefor functions such as route guidanceand roadside assistance. GPS isaffected by structures that canobstruct the signal, such as tunnels,parking structures, and tall buildings.It may not be possible for OnStar topinpoint your location if you are in ornear such structures.

OnStar uses cellular technology tocommunicate with your vehicle.Cellular coverage varies by location,which may affect the ability toestablish a connection, or the qualityof the connection.

When you turn off your vehicle’signition, the OnStar system goes intolow-power mode. After 48 hours, itswitches to sleep mode to conserveyour vehicle’s battery power.Features such as remote doorunlocking and misplaced vehicleassistance will not work after yourvehicle has been parked for morethan 48 hours.

OnStar is a registered trademark ofthe OnStar Corporation.

OnStar has an antenna on the roof ofthe vehicle. To avoid receptionproblems, do not cover this antenna.

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.


This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

System Limitations

OnStar

184

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 186...............................Gasoline Type . 186

.........Service Station Procedures . 187....................................Refueling . 187

Opening and Closing the........................................hood . 188

...................................Oil Check . 189.............Engine Coolant Check . 190

...............................Fuel Economy . 190...Accessories and Modifications . 191

.............................Carrying Cargo . 193

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

185

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the Malfunction IndicatorLamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized Acura dealer forservice.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to yourQuick Start Guide.

Use of a gasoline with a pump octaneless than 86 can lead to enginedamage.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance.

We recommended using a qualitygasoline containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

186

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

eventhough the tank is not full, there maybe a problem with your vehicle’s fuelvapor recovery system. The systemhelps keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. Consult yourdealer.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedure

Refueling

Before

Driving

187

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the Malfunction IndicatorLamp may come on (see page

).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to your left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

1.

5.

6.

2.

273


Opening and Closing the Hood

188

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

To close the hood, lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then press down firmly withyour hands. Make sure it is securelylatched.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

1.

3.

3.

2.

4.

237


Adding Oil

Oil Check

Before

Driving

189

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering andhard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

240

230

230

For example,

Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

190

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows as these may interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andTire Pressure Monitoring System.

Before installing any accessory,have the installer contact yourdealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

280

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

Before

Driving

191

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Some examples are:Lowering your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect handling and stability.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withaftermarket components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire PressureMonitoring System.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle

192

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxFront door and seat-back pocketsRear cargo area, including thesecond and third row seats whenfolded flatConsole compartmentRear compartment

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Roof-rack (if equipped)

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

193

CARGO AREA

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT SEAT-BACK POCKETS

GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKETS

REAR COMPARTMENT

×

－

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,158 lbs (525 kg).

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

For example, if there will be five150 lbs (70 kg) occupants in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is408 lbs (175 kg).5 150 lbs (70 kg) = 750 lbs(350 kg)1,158 lbs (525 kg) 750 lbs (350 kg)= 408 lbs (175 kg)

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4[408 lbs (175 kg) in this example].

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,158lbs (525 kg)’’ on your vehicle’splacard (on the driver’s doorjamb).

To determine the correct cargo andluggage load limit:

The maximum load for your vehicleis 1,158 lbs (525 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

194

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be properly secured onthe floor of the cargo area. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown forward in a crash or asudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used tocover the cargo area behind the thirdrow seats. When the third row seatsare folded down, the cargo cover canbe installed in a forward position andextended over the larger cargo area.Do not install the cargo cover in theforward position if the third rowseats are not folded down.

If you fold down the second orthird row seats, follow theinstructions above and be sure tokeep all cargo near the windowsbelow the bottom of the windows.If cargo is higher, it couldinterfere with proper operation ofthe side curtain airbags.

54

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Optional Separation Net

Optional Cargo Cover

Before

Driving

195

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 System, the VSAsystem, Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem, and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 198

........................Preparing to Drive . 198.......................Starting the Engine . 199

..............Automatic Transmission . 200Variable Torque Management

..............................4WD System . 204

..............................VTM-4 Lock . 204Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 205...........................................Parking . 207

.............................Braking System . 208...........................Anti-lock Brakes . 209

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 211

.................Towing Weight Limits . 213...........................Towing a Trailer . 214

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a................................Motorhome . 222

..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 223

DrivingD

riving

197

Your vehicle has higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Make sure the doors and tailgateare securely closed and locked.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

95

16

59

86

78

See page for additional guidelinesfor driving off-highway.

223

Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive

Driving Guidelines

Preparing to Drive

198

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START (III) for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If theengine does not start right away,pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.If the engine still does not start,return to step 5.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the EngineD

riving

199

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. See

on page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

80

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcome on along with the ‘‘D ’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration andhave the transmission checked by anAcura dealer as soon as possible.

Before shifting from park to anyposition, press firmly on the brakepedal making sure to keep your footoff the accelerator pedal. You cannotshift out of Park when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position.

5

5

Do this:Press the brake pedal,making sure to keep yourfoot off the acceleratorpedal, then move the shiftlever.

Move the lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to NN to DD to DD to DD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to DD to NN to RR to P

5

5 4

4 3

3

3

3 4

4 5

5

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Shifting

200

－－－

－－－

CONTINUED

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal, making sure to keep your footoff the accelerator pedal, then shiftfrom Park to Reverse. To shift fromNeutral to Reverse, come to acomplete stop and then shift.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press thebrake pedal, making sure to keepyour foot off the accelerator pedal,when you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse from Neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 7 9 mph (12 14km/h).

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal and slowly shift toNeutral, and then to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to Reverse. (Referto on page ).

Use this position fornormal driving. The transmissionautomatically selects a suitable gearfor your speed and acceleration. Youmay notice the transmission shiftingup at higher speeds when the engineis cold. This helps the engine warmup faster.

203

203


Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R) Neutral (N)

Shift Lock Release

Drive (D )5 Driving

201

－－－These positionsare similar to D , except when youselect the D position, only the firstfour gears are selected. When youselect D , only the first three gearsare selected. D can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenfourth and fifth gears in stop-and-godriving, and D can keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use Second gear:For more power when climbing.To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

With the lever in thisposition, the transmission locks inFirst gear.

If you shift into First position whenthe vehicle speed is above 31 mph(50 km/h), the transmission shiftsinto Second gear first to avoidsudden engine braking.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Use D to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. Dgives you more power and increasedengine braking.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

To help reduce wheel spin.

54

34

3

33


Drive (D , D ) Second (2) First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter

4 3

202

Set the parking brake.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

To release the Reverse Lockout,make sure the ignition switch is inthe ACCESSORY (I) position. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift

Lock Release slot cover. Using akey, carefully pry on the edge ofthe cover to remove it.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Push down on the key and movethe shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

To release the reverse lockout,move the shift lever from Neutralto Reverse, then to Park.

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaldoes not shift the transmission out ofPark. This procedure is also used torelease the Reverse Lockout.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot. Press the brakepedal and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.


Shift Lock Release

Driving

203

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOTCOVER

The Variable Torque Management4WD System (VTM-4) automaticallytransfers varying amounts of enginetorque to the rear wheels underlower traction conditions.

The vehicle must be stopped withthe engine running.

If more traction is needed when yourvehicle is stuck, or is likely tobecome stuck, you can use theVTM-4 Lock button to increasetorque to the rear wheels.

Move the shift lever to First (1),Second (2), or Reverse (R) gear.Press the VTM-4 Lock button.The indicator in the button comeson.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

doone of the following:

Press the VTM-4 Lock button.Move the shift lever to D , D orD .Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0).

The VTM-4 Lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It willautomatically engage again as thespeed slows below 18 mph (30km/h). The indicator in the buttonwill remain on.

1.

2.

3.

5 43

To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,

VTM-4 System

204

Do not use the VTM-4 Lock button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

Do not continuously spin the f ront tiresof your vehicle. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator and theappropriate tire on the tire pressuremonitor to come on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning light is lit, one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, each tire should bechecked monthly, including thespare.

Check the pressure with the tirescold, after the vehicle has beenparked for at least 2 hours.

Set to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the vehicleplacard and in the owner’s manual(see page ).252

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Driving

205

The appropriate tire indicator andlow tire pressure indicator comes onif a tire becomes significantlyunderinflated. Follow theinstructions under ‘‘Low TirePressure Indicator’’.

The indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

After you replace the flat tire, theLow Tire Pressure indicator stays on.This is normal; the system is notmonitoring the spare tire pressure.Manually check the spare tirepressure to be sure it is correct.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).261

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Changing a Tire with TPMS

206

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is on anincline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area, or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb, and set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb, and set the parking brake.

Parking Tips

ParkingD

riving

207

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System

208

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andmay hear some noise. This is normal:it is the ABS rapidly pumping thebrakes. On dry pavement, you willneed to press on the brake pedalvery hard before the ABS activates.However, you may feel the ABSactivate immediately if you are tryingto stop on snow or ice.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .274

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

Driving

209

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on togetherand the parking break is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

210

The Vehicle Stability Assist systemhelps to stabilize the vehicle duringcornering if the vehicle turns moreor less than desired. It also assistsyou in maintaining traction whileaccelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine’s output, andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some unusual noise from themodulator.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink. Theremay also be some unusual noisefrom the modulator.

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

CONTINUED

VSA Activation Indicator VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) SystemD

riving

211

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned toON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have yourdealer inspect your vehicle as soonas possible.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.

255

260

VSA Off Switch

VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

212

Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Be sure to read theon page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

The maximum weight of the trailerand everything in or on it depends onthe number of occupants in yourvehicle and the type of trailer beingtowed (see page ).

Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance.

The weight that the tongue of a fullyloaded trailer puts on the hitchshould be 5 to 10 percent of the totaltrailer weight for boat trailers, and 8to 15 percent of total trailer weightfor all other trailers. (See page

for limits for your towingsituation). Too much tongue loadreduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway.

223

215215

Driving Off-Highway Guidelines section

Towing Weight Limits

Load Limit

Total Trailer WeightTongue Load

Driving

213

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

－

－

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo and the tongueload is 5,787 lbs (2,630 kg).

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described next.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page thatyou do not exceed the limit for yourconditions.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Measure and record the distancefrom the ground to the bottom ofthe trailer hitch.

Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.

Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.

Subtract the second measurementfrom the first measurement, thenrefer to the following table.

If thedifference is:

1 ½’’2 ¼’’3’’

3 ¾’’

If the difference is more than 3 ¾’’inch, you have too much load on thetongue. Redistribute the load orremove cargo as needed.

Estimatedtongue load is:

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (159 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)

The maximumallowable weight on the vehicle axlesare 2,888 lbs (1,310 kg) on the frontaxle, and 2,992 lbs (1,360 kg) on therear axle.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle and trailer is9,584 lbs (4,470 kg) with the properhitch and fluid coolers. (See page

for information about fluidcoolers.)

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

215

217

Towing a Trailer

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Estimating Loads

Gross Axle Weight Ratings(GAWR)

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR):

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

To Estimate the Tongue Load

214

＊

＊

＊

Number ofOccupants

234567

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Towing is Not Recommended

Number ofOccupants

234567

Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Towing is Not Recommended

Towing Weight LimitsD

riving

215

4500 lbs (2045 kg)4500 lbs (2045 kg)4500 lbs (2045 kg)4000 lbs (1820 kg)1700 lbs (770 kg)


90 lbs (40 kg)

3500 lbs (1590 kg)3500 lbs (1590 kg)3000 lbs (1365 kg)2000 lbs (910 kg)1000 lbs (455 kg)


90 lbs (40 kg)

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7

kg) of luggage in the cargo area.

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:BOAT TRAILERS

OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendant watches thescale.

Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 2882 lbs (1307 kg)

If you cannot weight on the rearaxle directly, you can calculate therear gross axle weight bysubtracting the weight in Step 1from the weight in Step 2.

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit: 5,798 lbs (2,630 kg)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads

216

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchase Acuraequipment whenever possible.

Your dealer offers a trailer packagethat includes a hitch, a ball mount, awiring harness, a heavy-dutytransmission fluid cooler.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state, federal, province,and local regulations.

We strongly recommend that youhave your dealer install an Acurahitch and use the required fluidcoolers. Using non-Acura equipmentmay result in serious damage to yourvehicle.

To help prevent overheating, aheavy-duty transmission fluid coolerand a heavy-duty power steeringfluid cooler are required for trailertowing. These coolers are availableonly from your dealer.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in Step 5 fromtheweight in step 6.Limit: See page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

6.

7.

215

215

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitch

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

Weight Distributing Hitch

Driving

217

Acura requires that any trailer with atotal trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more have its own brakes.

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your brake manufacturer formore information on installingelectric brakes.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

255267

263

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Safety Chains

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

Spare Tires

218

CONTINUED

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check trailerlight requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

To get to your vehicle’s trailerlighting connector, open the tailgate,remove the cargo cover, thenremove the rear panel trim. Theconnector is on the left side.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install a Acura wiring harnessand converter. This harness hasbeen designed for your vehicle.

If you use a non-Acura trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the mating connector andpins that mate with the connector inyour vehicle from your dealer.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition. If you tow frequently,follow the Severe Conditionsmaintenance schedule.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights Pre-Tow Checklist

Driving

219

GROUND(BLACK)

RIGHT TURNSIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

BRAKELIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

LEFT TURNSIGNAL(GREEN/BLUE)

BACK-UPLIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated.

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 500miles (800kilometers) (see page ).

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.When towing a fixed-sided trailer (88km/h). At higher speeds, the trailermay sway or affect vehicle handling.

To prevent the transmission fromshifting frequently, drive in the D4position.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

186

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Break-In Period

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

220

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the transmission shifts frequentlywhile going up a hill, shift to D3.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,this could cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speed,and steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the bottom of the steeringwheel, then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left.Turn the wheel to the right to movethe trailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

If the vehicle’s tires slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4Lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 Lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

204

3

Towing a Trailer

Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Retrieving a Boat

Remember, ittakes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Driving

221

Your MDX can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100 km/h) or severetransmission damage will occur. Toavoid damage to the 4WD system, itmust be towed with all four wheelson the ground (flat towing).

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

Perform this procedure every dayimmediately before you begin towing.Otherwise, severe automatictransmission damage will occur.

Start the engine.

Check the transmission fluid level(see page ).

Press on the brake pedal. Shift thelever through all the positions (P,R, N, D , D , D , 2, 1).

Shift to D , then to N. Let theengine run for three minutes, thenturn it off.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersockets are turned off so you donot run down the battery.

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

242

5 4 3

5

Extended Towing

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

222

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your cargo loadlimits (see page and ).

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance and four-wheel drive VTM-4 system allow youto occasionally travel on unpavedroads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trailblazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

Whenever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

194 213


Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

223

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in the owner’smanual.Keep your speed low anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service and that you inspect yourvehicle. Pay special attention to thecondition of the tires and check thetire pressure.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressure.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second gear (2) willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow and ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not pumpthe brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause your

vehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all roadconditions or obstacles, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

Before driving through water, stopand make sure that:

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember:

Accelerating and Braking

Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes

Crossing a Stream

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

224

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.Proceed without shifting or changingspeeds, and do not stop the vehicleor shut off the engine.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gentlypump them while driving slowly untilthey operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4Lock (see page ). Carefully try togo in the direction (forward orreverse) that you think will get youunstuck. Do not spin the tires at highspeeds. It will not help you get outand may cause damage to thetransmission or VTM-4 system.

If you are unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose.

Use a nylon strap to attach the MDXto the recovery vehicle and carefullytake out the slack in the strap. Oncethe strap is tight, the recoveryvehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicle

needs good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may be able to safely tow alightweight trailer (such as amotorcycle or small tent trailer) off-road if you follow these guidelines.

Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45kg).Try to stay on smooth, level dirtroads, and avoid driving in hillyterrain.Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

204

If You Get Stuck

Towing a Trailer Off-Road

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

225

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 228.................Maintenance Schedule . 229

....................Maintenance Record . 233..............................Fluid Locations . 236

........................Adding Engine Oil . 237.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 238

..............................Engine Coolant . 240....................Windshield Washers . 241

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 242....................................Brake Fluid . 243

....................Power Steering Fluid . 244....................................Timing Belt . 244

.............................................Lights . 245................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 249

.....................................Floor Mats . 249.................................Wiper Blades . 250

...............................................Tires . 252...................Checking the Battery . 257

.............................Vehicle Storage . 258299

MaintenanceM

aintenance

227

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cool

before touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety


Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

228

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations in this owner’smanual.

－－

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendations:

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts. The load limitis shown on the tire informationlabel on the driver’s doorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Used primarily as a deliveryvehicle or taxi that is drivenmostly in stop-and-go traffic and/or parked with the engine idling.

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainous

conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

If you only OCCASIONALLYdrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Normal Conditions.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

186

Maintenance Schedule

Which Schedule to Follow

U.S. Owners Canadian Owners

Maintenance

229

NOTE:

－

－

－

－

－

－＃

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orskilled person to keep yourwarranties in effect. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of Acuraparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

U.S. Vehicles:

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed at the recommended timeor mileage period to ensure long-term reliability.

189

190

242

243

253

245

Maintenance Schedule

Servicing Your Vehicle

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

230

＊＊＃

＃

＃

＊

＊

＊

231

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

((OOrr eevveerryy 77 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))


Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first

At every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) up to 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 1 year, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.At 45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page .

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

120192

135216

150240

90144

75120

6096

4572

3048

1524

105168

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oilRotate tires (follow pattern on page 223 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brake wearCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearance

Replace automatic transmission fluidReplace transfer fluidReplace VTM-4 rear differential fluidInspect idle speedReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

Replace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

1:2:: 230

1

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

＊＊

＊＃

＃

＃

＊＊

＃＊

232

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first

7.512

1524

3048

4572

6096

75120

90144

105168

135216

150240

((OOrr eevveerryy 11 yyeeaarr,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))


Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)

((OOtthheerrwwiissee aaddjjuusstt oonnllyy iiff nnooiissyy))

((OOrr eevveerryy 77 yyeeaarrss,, wwhhiicchheevveerr ccoommeess ffiirrsstt))At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)At every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) up to 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 6 months, then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year.

See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Follow this schedule for rear differential fluid replacement if you use your vehicle for off-highway driving, trailer towing, mainly in stop-and-go driving. Otherwise, usethe fluid replacement schedule in the Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page .

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first

120192

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil and oil filterRotate tires (follow pattern on page 254 )Check front and rear brake wearInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension components, Driveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls/vehicle underbody

Inspect drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace automatic transmission fluidReplace transfer fluidReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearance

Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluidInspect idle speedReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt , and inspect water pump

Replace engine coolantReplace brake fluid1 :2 :

3 ::

244230

1, 2

, 3

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)

CONTINUED

Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

233

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km

72,000 km

78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.232

231

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

234

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km

168,000 km

174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

235

123,750 mi

127,500 mi

131,250 mi

135,000 mi

138,750 mi

142,500 mi

146,250 mi

150,000 mi

198,000 km

204,000 km

210,000 km

216,000 km

222,000 km

228,000 km

234,000 km

240,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Fluid Locations

236

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap) RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap, and tighten it securely. Waita few minutes and recheck the oillevel (see page ). Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

189

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

237

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil, itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given in the maintenanceschedule.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. The oiland filter collect contaminants thatcan damage your engine if they arenot removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

1.

2.

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

238

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

239

OIL FILTER

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

240

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.The low washer level indicator willcome on when the level is low (seepage ).Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

3.

4.

5.1.

2.

63

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Windshield Washers

Maintenance

241

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid into the tube to bring it to theupper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

242

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

LOWER MARKUPPER MARK

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly. Replace itaccording to the maintenanceschedule recommendations.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Insert the dipstick all the way backin the transmission.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

6. Brake Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake FluidM

aintenance

243

MAX

MIN

－－

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance schedule.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles(100,000 km) if you regularly driveyour vehicle in one or more of theseconditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).Frequently tow a trailer.Check the level on the side of the

reservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Timing BeltPower Steering Fluid

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

244

UPPER LEVEL

LOWERLEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, two on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its baseand protect the glass from contactwith your skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Open the hood.1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

245

BULB CONNECTORHalogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove a bulb, pull it straightout of its socket.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

1.

2.

4.

5.

6.

3.

4.

5.

Replacing Front Turn Signal/Parking and Side Marker LightBulbs

Lights

246

TAB

Open the tailgate. Use ascrewdriver protected with a clothto pry open the two covers.

Remove the two screws andremove the rear light assemblyfrom the rear pillar.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: brake/taillight, turnsignal/hazard lights, side markerlight, or back-up light.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Push the socket into the lightassembly and turn it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Install the rear light assembly inthe body. Tighten the two screws.Snap the covers back into position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

LightsM

aintenance

247

Remove the light assembly coverby prying carefully with a cloth-covered screwdriver in thenotches along the top edge. Thenpivot the cover out and down.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.


Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Place the cover back into the lightassembly. Push it up until it locksin place.

1.

4.

5.

6.

2.

3.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

248

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchor. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

If you remove these floor mats,make sure to re-anchor them whenyou put them back in your vehicle.

If you use an aftermarket floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor MatsM

aintenance

249

LOOP

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard, or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.Windshield: Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Front only:Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

250

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Front only:Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Windshield: Lower the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe window.

6.

7.

4.

5.

3.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

251

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Tire pressure for high speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.

For additional technical informationabout your tires, see page .

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time.

205

288

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire SizeInflation Guidelines

Tires

252

P235/65R17 103T 32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured. Youshould look closely for punctures if atire starts losing pressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km).

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal; do notrelease air to match the coldpressure.

Tire Inspection

TiresM

aintenance

253

Your vehicle’s tires have wearindicators molded into the tread.When the tread wears down to thatpoint, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7mm) wide band running across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire. A tire that is this worn givesvery little traction on wet roads. Youshould replace the tire if you can seethe tread wear indicator in three ormore places around the tire.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires every 7,500 miles (12,000km). Move the tires to the positionsshown in the chart each time theyare rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

Tires

254

Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, yourTire Pressure Monitoring Systemwill not work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour Acura dealer.

Wheel:

Tires:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size explanation.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

286

288

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Replacing Tires and Wheels

TiresM

aintenance

255

17 x 6 1/2 JJ

P235/65R17 103T

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Do not use any chains on rearwheels. Use traction devices onlywhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Tires

256

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the BatteryM

aintenance

257

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles(48,000 km) maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

231

Vehicle Storage

258

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 260....................Changing a Flat Tire . 261

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 267................................Jump Starting . 268

............If Your Engine Overheats . 270.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 272..........Charging System Indicator . 272

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 273...............Brake System Indicator . 274

......................Emergency Towing . 274..............................................Fuses . 275

..............................Fuse Locations . 278

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

259

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on acompact spare.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Compact Spare Tire

260

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

2.1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

261

JACK

TOOLS SPARE TIRE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Open the tailgate.

The tools and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover bypushing the top of the cover.

Take the tools out of the storagecompartment.

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover on thecargo area lining to access theshaft for the spare tire hoist.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Changing a Flat Tire

262

COVER COVER

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

Keep turning the wheel nutwrench to create slack in the cable.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Put the wheel nut wrench on thehoist shaft. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.

11.

10.

8.

9.

CONTINUED


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

263

BRACKETWHEEL NUT WRENCH

The wheel nut wrench supplied withyour vehicle is specially adapted to f itthe hoist shaf t. Do not use any othertool.

△

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. It is pointed to by amark molded into the underside ofthe body. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

12. 13.

14.

15.


264

JACKING POINT

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUBWHEEL NUT WRENCH

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap from theflat tire.

Place the flat tire face up underthe hoist.

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

20.

21.

18.

19.

17.

16.

CONTINUED


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

265

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Slowly turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise to take up the slack ofthe hoist cable. Make sure thebracket is seated in the centerhole of the spare tire.

Turn the wheel nut wrenchclockwise until the flat tire restsagainst the underbody of thevehicle and you hear the hoistclick.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools, and installthe cover.

Turn off VSA (see page ).

Refer to Changing a flat tire withTPMS (see page ).

22.

23.

26.

25.

24.

212

206


266

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tire hoist, evenif you are not stowing a tire. If thehoist is lef t down, it will be damagedduring driving and need to be replaced.

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights, and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or do not come on atall, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly (see page ).

268

274

257

268

80

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

267

＋

＋

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

To jump start your vehicle:

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

3.

276

274

199Starting the

Engine

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

268

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

－The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromthe grounding strap on yourvehicle, then from the boosterbattery. Disconnect the positivecable from your vehicle, then fromthe booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.5.

7.

4.

6.

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

269

BOOSTER BATTERY

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all accessories, and turnon the hazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason.

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

1.

2.

3.

If Your Engine Overheats


270

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.10.

11.

9.

274

274


EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

271

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

189

237

274

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

272

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition to ON (II), without startingthe engine. The MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinks 5times, the readiness codes are notset. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer tofor more information (see page ).

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator could come onbecause of a loose or missing fuel fillcap. Tighten the cap until it clicks atleast three times. Tightening the capwill not turn the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

294

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

State Emissions TestingReadiness Code T

akingC

areof

theU

nexpected

273

If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and the engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

The brake system indicatornormally comes on whenyou turn the ignition switchto ON (II), and as areminder to check theparking brake. It will stayon if you do not fullyrelease the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take thevehicle to your dealer and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Refer toon page

for non-emergency towinginformation.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

243

222

Brake System Indicator Emergency Towing

Towing Your VehicleBehind a Motorhome

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Brake System Indicator, Emergency Towing

274

Canada

U.S.

Towing your vehicle with two tires onthe ground will damage parts of the4WD system. It should be transportedon a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedunder the dashboard on the driver’sand passenger’s side.

The vehicle’s fuses are contained infive fuse boxes.

To open the passenger’s side fusebox, pull the right edge of the cover.

The primary under-hood fuse box ison the passenger’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is next to thebattery.

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

275

PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIOR

UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)

DRIVER’S SIDEINTERIOR

UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. The diagram forthe interior driver’s side fuse box ison the kick panel below the fuse box.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

4.3.

1.

2

278 279

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

276

BLOWN FUSE PULLER

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

6.

5.

131

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

277

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

－

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. No. Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

123456789

10111213

20 A30 A20 A15 A15 A

20 A20 A20 A40 A30 A30 A40 A

Spare FuseSpare FuseRight HeadlightACG SHazardNot usedStopLeft HeadlightRadioPower Window MotorRear A/CRear DefrosterBack Up, ACC

1415161718192021222324

40 A40 A30 A

7.5 A10 A15 A

120 A30 A

7.5 A50 A20 A

Power SeatHeater MotorCooling FanSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCondenser FanMG ClutchIGI MainFog Lights

12345

20 A40 A30 A20 A20 A

6789

10

15 A15 A15 A7.5 A20 A

ETCIG CoilLAFFI-Back-upP/W DR

Rear Entertainment SystemVSA F/S RelayVSA Motor4WDRear Accessory Socket

Fuse Locations

278

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

Horn

Auto Wipers

12

3

7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A

123

45

6789

10111213

15 A10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A10 A

15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A15 A30 A

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower MirrorDaytime Running Light /Rear WiperECU (PCM), Cruise ControlOPDS, OnStarACC RelayBack-up Lights, InstrumentLights, TPMSTurn SignalsIG CoilFront WiperNot Used

Moonroof

Driver’s Power Seat SlidingPassenger’s Power SeatRecliningDaytime Running Light,OnStarDriver’s side Rear PowerWindowFront Passenger’s PowerWindowFront Accessory Socket,HFL, OnStarSmall LightInterior Light, TPMS, HFLPower Door LockBack Up, ClockHeated SeatDriver’s Power WindowPassenger’s Side RearPower Window

12345

6

7

8

9

10111213141516

30 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

10 A

20 A

20 A

15 A

15 A10 A20 A

7.5 A20 A20 A20 A

: Canadian models

Canadian models:

ELD Unit, Immobilizer ControlUnit, VSA Control Unit, Alternator

Driver’s Power Seat RecliningPassenger’s Power Seat Sliding

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

279

Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

Front

Front

Driver’s SideAuxiliary

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 282................................Specifications . 284

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 286Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 286.................................Treadwear . 286

......................................Traction . 286.............................Temperature . 287

.................................Tire Labeling . 288

.......................Emissions Controls . 289.....................The Clean Air Act . 289

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 289

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 289

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 289

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 290....................PGM-FI System . 290

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 290

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 290

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 290

....................Replacement Parts . 290..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 291

..............State Emissions Testing . 292

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

281

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on theCertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

282

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

283

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

Specifications

284

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

1.88 US gal (7.1 )2.38 US gal (9.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )2.9 US qt (2.7 )7.7 US qt (7.3 )

188.7 in (4,793 mm)77.0 in (1,955 mm)68.7 in (1,744 mm)71.3 in (1,811 mm)106.3 in (2,700 mm)66.3 in (1,685 mm)66.5 in (1,690 mm)

9,835 lbs (4,461 kg)

HFC-134a (R-134a)24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)

ND-OIL8

2.9 US qt (2.7 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )

0.45 US qt (0.43 )0.48 US qt (0.45 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steering fluidcooler.

LengthWidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluidTransferassemblyfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

StandardPremium

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

20.4 US gal (77.0 )

2 1

1

2

－－

－－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

285

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Lights

60 W (HB3)12 V

10.0 : 1211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

12 V 55 W (H11)3 CP

12 V 28/8 W

12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 5 W12 V 21 W12 V 21 W/5 W12 V 21 CP (18 W)12 V 3 CP12 V 21 W12 V 5 W12 V 5 W

5 W5 W1.1 W3.8 W

12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V 52 AH/5 HRCapacity

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs IZFR5K-11

SKJ16DR-M11

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,V6 gasoline engine

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0°50’0°50’

1°53’

P235/65R17 103TT155/90D16 110M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Headlights

Front side marker lightsFront turn signal lights/Parking lightsFog lightFront foot lightsRear turn signal/hazard lightsBrake/TaillightsBackup lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightIndividual map lights

Cargo area lightTailgate lightVanity mirror lightDoor light

See page 279 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 279 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 278 or the fuse boxcover.

12 V 65 AH/20 HR

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

HighLow

NGK:DENSO:

－The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

286

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

TechnicalInform

ation

287

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. The following is anexample of tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

P

225

55

R

94

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

288

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P225/55R16 94V

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

231

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery T

echnicalInformation

289

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

290

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

291

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTER

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

292

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

State Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

293

Customer Service................................Information . 296

....................Warranty Coverages . 297Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 298.....................Authorized Manuals . 299

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

295

U.S. Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Bella International Corp.C-1 Bechara St. Segarra CornerPuerto Nuevo, Puerto Rico 00920

Tel:(787) 620-7028

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Service Office.

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way. Canadian Owners:

282

Customer Service Information

296

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2005 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2005 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

297

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or Acura Automobile Division,American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

298

＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００５

ＡＣＵ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

299

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$69.00

$47.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61S3V05

61S3V05EL

61S3V30

31S3V640

31S3V840

31S3V920

31S3VQ20

ACU-R

Form Description

2003-2005 Acura MDX Service Manual

2003-05 Acura MDX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2001-05 Acura MDX

Body Repair Manual

2005 Acura MDX Owner’s Manual

2005 Acura MDX

Navigation Manual

2005 Acura MDX Maintenance Journal

2005 Acura MDX Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

www. helminc. com

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

300

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 191ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 81............Accessory Power Sockets . 104

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 238.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 24

..............Air Conditioning System . 106.....................Rear A/C Control . 111

.........................................Usage . 107.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 108.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 252

......................................Antifreeze . 240Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

....................Indicator Light . 61, 209...................................Operation . 209

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 131.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 81

................Audio System . 112, 118, 123...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22

.........................Automatic Lighting . 75.............Automatic Speed Control . 146..............Automatic Transmission . 200

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 284...............Checking Fluid Level . 242

.......................................Shifting . 200.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 200

................Shift Lever Positions . 200....................Shift Lock Release . 203

...........................Automatic Wipers . 72

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 60, 272............................Jump Starting . 268

..............................Maintenance . 257............................Specifications . 285

..............................Before Driving . 185..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21

.........................Beverage Holders . 102..................................Booster Seats . 51

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 209

.............Break-in, New Linings . 186...........................................Fluid . 243

....................Bulb Replacement . 247.........................................Parking . 94

.................System Indicator . 61, 274........................Wear Indicators . 208

.............................Braking System . 208.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 186

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 76........................Brights, Headlights . 74

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 247

..............................Brake Lights . 247................Front Parking Lights . 246

........Front Side Marker Lights . 246.................................Headlights . 245

.........High-mount Brake Light . 248.................................Rear Bulbs . 247

............................Specifications . 285....................Turn Signal Lights . 246

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 245

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

＊

................................Cancel Button . 146............................Capacities Chart . 284

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54.............................Carrying Cargo . 193

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii.........................................CD Care . 128

..........................CD Changer . 125, 126.....CD Changer Error Messages . 129

.......................................CD Player . 125........................Certification Label . 282

...................................Chains, . 256Change Oil

........................................How to . 238......................................When to . 229

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 261...Charging System Indicator . 60, 272

............Checklist, Before Driving . 198..................Childproof Door Locks . 82

.....................................Child Safety . 35..............................Booster Seats . 51

.............................Child Seats . 43, 44.....Important Safety Reminders . 38

..........................................Infants . 40..........................Larger Children . 50

.........................................LATCH . 45......................Risks with Airbags . 36

.............................Small Children . 41..........................................Tether . 48

.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 36.......................................Child Seats . 43

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 48...............Climate Control System . 106

..............................................Clock . 151.....................Code, Audio System . 131

........................CO in the Exhaust . 289......................Compact Spare Tire . 260

...............Consumer Information . 296.............Controls, Instruments and . 57

Coolant........................................Adding . 240

....................................Checking . 190.........................Proper Solution . 240

...................Temperature Gauge . 69Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 289................Cruise Control Indicator . 63............Cruise Control Operation . 146

...................................Cup Holders . 102..........Customer Relations Office . 296

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 58

................Daytime Running Lights . 76.................................Dead Battery . 268

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 298................Defogger, Rear Window . 77..............Defrosting the Windows . 109

....................................Dimensions . 284...............Dimming the Headlights . 74

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 242

..................................Engine Oil . 190..........................Directional Signals . 74

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 208.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 239

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 82

....................Lockout Prevention . 82......................Power Door Locks . 82

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 286...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

...........................................Driving . 197....................................Economy . 190

tires

Index

C D

II

CONTINUED

Driving Position Memory..........................................System . 97

..................DVD Error Messages . 141...................................DVD Player . 134

..............................Economy, Fuel . 190..................................Emergencies . 259

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 268...........Brake System Indicator . 274

................Changing a Flat Tire . 261.....Charging System Indicator . 272

..................Checking the Fuses . 276.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 76.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 272...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 273

..................Overheated Engine . 270.......................................Towing . 274

...........................Emergency Brake . 94......................Emergency Flashers . 76

......................Emergency Towing . 274.......................Emissions Controls . 289

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 69

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 60, 273

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 272

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 237...............................Overheating . 270

............................Specifications . 285

............................Speed Limiter . 202.......................................Starting . 189

...................Engine, . 267.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 289

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 290Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

...................................Fan, Interior . 107Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 105....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 187

Filters...............................................Oil . 238

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 261

.....................................Floor Mats . 249Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 242..........................................Brake . 243

..........................Power Steering . 244..................Windshield Washer . 241

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 116

........................................Fog Lights . 77................Folding the Second Seat . 89

...................Folding the Third Seat . 90..........................Four-way Flashers . 76

........................................Front Seat . 86......................................Adjusting . 86

.........................................Airbags . 26

.........................................Heaters . 91.................................................Fuel . 186

......................Fill Door and Cap . 187...........................................Gauge . 68

................Octane Requirement . 186...............................Oxygenated . 186

........................Reserve Indicator . 63........................Tank, Filling the . 187

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 276

if it won’t start

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 190.........................................Gasoline . 186

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 63...........................................Gauge . 68

................Octane Requirement . 186........................Tank, Filling the . 187

................Gas Station Procedures . 187Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 69...............................................Fuel . 68

...............................Speedometer . 68.................................Tachometer . 68

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 214

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight.......................................Rating) . 214

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 200......................................Glove Box . 102

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight.......................................Rating) . 214

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 245.............................HandsFreeLink . 160..............................HFL Buttons . 161

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76........................................Headlights . 74

........................................Aiming . 245....................Automatic Lighting . 75

............Daytime Running Lights . 76..................High Beam Indicator . 63

...........High Beams, Turning on . 74............Low Beams, Turning on . 74

.........................Reminder Chime . 74........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 245

...................................Turning on . 74...................................Headphones . 147

..............................Head Restraints . 88.................................Heated Mirror . 96.................................Heaters, Seats . 91

.....................Heating and Cooling . 106.................High-Low Beam Switch . 74

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 156

.......................Hood, Opening the . 188..................................................Horn . 70

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 282Ignition

..............................................Keys . 79...........................................Switch . 81

............Timing Control System . 290........................Immobilizer System . 80

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 60

...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 61....................................A/T Temp . 64

Brake (Parking and Brake....................................System) . 61

.................................Brake Lamp . 62........................Charging System . 60

.............................Cruise Control . 63DRL (Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 63...................................High Beam . 63

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 61.....................................Lights On . 64......................................Low Fuel . 63

........................Low Oil Pressure . 60......................Low Tire Pressure . 66

...............Maintenance Required . 67

Index

G H I

IV

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 79

...........................Side Airbag Off . 60.......................................Seat Belt . 60

...............................................SRS . 60...............Tire Pressure Monitor . 66

.............................TPMS System . 66Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 62............................VSA Activation . 65

.................................VSA System . 65..........................................VTM-4 . 64

..............................Washer Level . 63..................Individual Map Lights . 100

...............................Infant Restraint . 40......................................Infant Seats . 40

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 252...................................Inside Mirror . 95

.............................Inspection, Tire . 253........................Instrument Panel . 4, 59

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76.................................Interior Lights . 99

........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 264.......................................Jack, Tire . 261

................................Jump Starting . 268

.......................Label, Certification . 282.................Lane Change, Signaling . 74

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21......................Light Control Switch . 99

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 245

.......................................Indicator . 60.........................................Interior . 99.........................................Parking . 74

..................................Turn Signal . 74.............................Load Limit . 194, 213

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 81Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 81

............................Fuel Fill Door . 187..................................Glove Box . 102

....................Lockout Prevention . 82.................................Power Door . 82

........................Low Coolant Level . 190.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 272...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 284

...............Luggage, . 193

..................................Maintenance . 227Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 230.................................Record . 233-235

......................Required Indicator . 67..........................................Safety . 228

.............................Schedule . 229-232.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 60, 273

..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 87.............Memory, Driving Position . 97

...............................Meters, Gauges . 68..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 95

storing (cargo)

Index

J

L

K

M

IND

EX

V

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 192.........................................Moonroof . 93

...................Neutral Gear Position . 201..................New Vehicle Break-in . 186

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 282

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 186.........................................Odometer . 68

...............................Odometer, Trip . 69....................Off-Highway Driving . 223...................Off-Road Precautions . 223

Oil........................Change, How to . 238......................Change, When to . 231......................Checking Engine . 189..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 272

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 237

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81............................................OnStar . 173

..............................Outside Mirrors . 95....................Overheating, Engine . 270

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 230.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 186

..............Panel Brightness Control . 76........................Park Gear Position . 201

...........................................Parking . 207.................................Parking Brake . 94.................................Parking Lights . 74

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 291.............................PGM-FI System . 290

................Power Seat Adjustments . 86...............Power Socket Locations . 104

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 35

.....................General Guidelines . 35.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.......Protecting Larger Children . 50.........Protecting Small Children . 41

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 48

.............................Using LATCH . 45

...................Radiator Overheating . 270.....Radio/CD Sound System . 112, 113

...............................Rear A/C Unit . 111............Rear Audio Control Panel . 136

........Rear Entertainment System . 132..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 247.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 155

............................Rear View Mirror . 95.................Rear Window Defogger . 77

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 73.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 86, 87

...........Reclining the Second Seats . 89................Reclining the Third Seat . 90

.............................Reminder Lights . 60................Remote Audio Controls . 130.................Remote Control (RES) . 137

.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

Index

N

O

PR

VI

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 238

..........................................Fuses . 271................................Light Bulbs . 245

....................................Schedule . 229................................Timing Belt . 244

...........................................Tires . 252.............................Wiper Blades . 250

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 23

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 190..................Reverse Gear Position . 201

................................Rotation, Tire . 254

................................Safety Belts . 10, 21.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 298

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

..................................Door Locks . 13..........................Head Restraints . 15

...............................Seat Belts . 10, 16...............Seats & Seat-Backs . 13, 14

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55...............................Safety Messages . ii

.......................Satellite Radio, XM . 118...................................Seat Belts . 10, 21

...............Additional Information . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 22.....................................Cleaning . 249

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21................................Maintenance . 23

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 21, 60

...................System Components . 21...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16.................................................Seats . 86

.........Adjusting the Second Seat . 89...........Adjusting the Third Seat . 90............Folding the Second Seat . 89

...............Folding the Third Seat . 90..........................Head Restraints . 88

.......................Third Row Access . 90............................Security System . 145

...............................Serial Number . 282...........................Service Intervals . 231...........................Service Manual . 299

.........Service Station Procedures . 187

Shifting the Automatic.............................Transmission . 200

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 200........................Shift Lock Release . 203

....................................Side Airbags . 29......................Side Curtain Airbags . 31

Side Marker Lights, Bulb.........................Replacement in . 246

...............................Signaling Turns . 74.....................................Snow Tires . 256

................Sound System . 112, 118, 123Spare Tire

..............................Inflating . 253, 260............................Specifications . 285

....................Specifications Charts . 284................................Speed Control . 146...................................Speedometer . 68

..........SRS, Additional Information . 24...Additional Safety Precautions . 34

......Airbag System Components . 24.............................Airbag Service . 33

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 26

Index

S

IND

EX

VII

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 29How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 31.............................SRS Indicator . 31, 60

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81.......................Starting the Engine . 198

................With a Dead Battery . 268..............State Emissions Testing . 292

........Steam Coming from Engine . 270Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 78.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 81

...Stereo Sound System . 112, 118, 123....................Storing Your Vehicle . 258

........................................Sun Visor . 103Supplemental Restraint System

......................................Servicing . 33.........................SRS Indicator . 31, 60

...................System Components . 24..................................Synthetic Oil . 238

.....................................Tachometer . 68......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 247

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 259

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 286.....Emissions Control Systems . 289

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 291

.......................Temperature Gauge . 69...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 22

............................Theft Protection . 131..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 291

....................................Timing Belt . 244

....................................Tire Chains . 256.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 261

.................................Tire Labeling . 288Tire Pressure Monitoring

....................System (TPMS) . 205Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 66, 205.......Tire Pressure Monitor . 66, 206

..................TPMS Indicator . 66, 206...............................................Tires . 252

..............................Air Pressure . 252.........................Checking Wear . 254..........................Compact Spare . 260

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 286......................................Inflation . 252

..................................Inspection . 253

..............................Maintenance . 254...................................Replacing . 255

......................................Rotating . 254...........................................Snow . 256

............................Specifications . 285................................Tire Chains . 256

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 213

................Emergency Wrecker . 274....Equipment and Accessories . 217

.............................Weight Limit . 213Your Vehicle Behind a

............................Motorhome . 222.........................Trailer Loading . 215

.................Trailer Towing Tips . 220Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 242...........................Fluid Selection . 242

..............Identification Number . 282.............Shifting the Automatic . 200

.....................................Treadwear . 286..............................Trip Computer . 149

.......................................Trip Meter . 69....................................Turn Signals . 74

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 261

Index

T

VIII

＊＊

........................XM Satellite Radio . 118Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 259

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 286........................Unleaded Gasoline . 186

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 239

................................Vanity Mirror . 103.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 194

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 284....Vehicle Identification Number . 282

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 211

........VSA System Indicator . 65, 211...VSA Activation Indicator . 65, 211

.........................VSA Off Switch . 214.............................Vehicle Storage . 258

.....................................Ventilation . 108.................................................VIN . 282

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 237

..................................VTM-4 Lock . 204

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55

..................Warranty Coverages . 297Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 241............................Level Indicator . 63

.....................................Operation . 71Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 78......................................Wrench . 263

Windows..................Operating the Power . 92

...........................Rear, Defogger . 77Windshield

...................................Defroster . 109.......................................Washers . 71

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 250

.....................................Operation . 71Rear Windshield Wiper and

.....................................Washer . 73....................................Worn Tires . 253

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 274

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

W

V

U X

IND

EX

IX

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Front/Rear:

Compact Spare Tire:

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

237

242

244

243

20.4 US gal (77.0 )

2005 mdx online reference owner's manual...

Documents